WO1999006433A1 - Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4 - Google Patents

Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1999006433A1
WO1999006433A1 PCT/US1998/015952 US9815952W WO9906433A1 WO 1999006433 A1 WO1999006433 A1 WO 1999006433A1 US 9815952 W US9815952 W US 9815952W WO 9906433 A1 WO9906433 A1 WO 9906433A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
alkyl
heterocyclic
aryl
heteroaryl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1998/015952
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Michael S. Dappen
Darren B. Dressen
Francine S. Grant
Michael A. Pleiss
Cynthia Y. Robinson
Dimitrios Sarantakis
Eugene D. Thorsett
Original Assignee
Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
American Home Products Corporation
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc., American Home Products Corporation filed Critical Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority to HU0004529A priority Critical patent/HUP0004529A3/en
Priority to AU86786/98A priority patent/AU8678698A/en
Priority to BR9811569-3A priority patent/BR9811569A/en
Priority to EP98938207A priority patent/EP1001973A1/en
Priority to KR1020007001005A priority patent/KR20010022423A/en
Priority to CA002290746A priority patent/CA2290746A1/en
Priority to JP2000505188A priority patent/JP2001512136A/en
Priority to IL13364198A priority patent/IL133641A0/en
Publication of WO1999006433A1 publication Critical patent/WO1999006433A1/en
Priority to NO20000451A priority patent/NO20000451L/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0606Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing heteroatoms not provided for by C07K5/06086 - C07K5/06139, e.g. Ser, Met, Cys, Thr
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06Antiasthmatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/06Antipsoriatics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02Ophthalmic agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents
    • A61P35/04Antineoplastic agents specific for metastasis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06026Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atom, i.e. Gly or Ala
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06078Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06104Dipeptides with the first amino acid being acidic
    • C07K5/06113Asp- or Asn-amino acid
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06139Dipeptides with the first amino acid being heterocyclic
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • This invention relates to compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion and, in particular, leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4.
  • VLA-4 (also referred to as 4 ⁇ 1 integrin and CD49d/CD29), first identified by Hemler and Takada 1 is a member of the ⁇ l integrin family of cell surface receptors, each of which comprises two subunits, an ⁇ chain and a ⁇ chain.
  • VLA-4 contains an ⁇ 4 chain and a ⁇ l chain.
  • VLA-4 for example, binds to fibronectin.
  • VLA-4 also binds non-matrix molecules that are expressed by endothelial and other cells. These non-matrix molecules include VCAM-1, which is expressed on cytokine-activated human umbilical vein endothelial cells in culture. Distinct epitopes of VLA-4 are responsible for the fibronectin and VCAM-1 binding activities and each activity has been shown to be inhibited independently. 2
  • Intercellular adhesion mediated by VLA-4 and other cell surface receptors is associated with a number of inflammatory responses.
  • activated vascular endothelial cells express molecules that are adhesive for leukocytes.
  • the mechanics of leukocyte adhesion to endothelial cells involves, in part, the recognition and binding of cell surface receptors on leukocytes to the corresponding cell surface molecules on endothelial cells. Once bound, the leukocytes migrate across the blood vessel wall to enter the injured site and release chemical mediators to combat infection.
  • adhesion receptors of the immune system see, for example, Springer 3 and Osborn 4 .
  • Inflammatory brain disorders such as experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE), multiple sclerosis (MS) and meningitis, are examples of central nervous system disorders in which the endothelium leukocyte adhesion mechanism results in destruction to otherwise healthy brain tissue.
  • EAE experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • MS multiple sclerosis
  • M multiple sclerosis
  • meningitis are examples of central nervous system disorders in which the endothelium leukocyte adhesion mechanism results in destruction to otherwise healthy brain tissue.
  • BBB blood brain barrier
  • the leukocytes release toxic mediators that cause extensive tissue damage resulting in impaired nerve conduction and paralysis.
  • tissue damage also occurs via an adhesion mechanism resulting in migration or activation of leukocytes.
  • tissue damage also occurs via an adhesion mechanism resulting in migration or activation of leukocytes.
  • the initial insult following myocardial ischemia to heart tissue can be further complicated by leukocyte entry to the injured tissue causing still further insult (Vedder et al. 5 ).
  • inflammatory conditions mediated by an adhesion mechanism include, by way of example, asthma 6"8 , Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis 9"10 , AIDS dementia 11 , diabetes 12"14 (including acute juvenile onset diabetis), inflammatory bowel disease 15 (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis 16"17 , rheumatoid arthritis 18"21 , tissue transplantation 22 , tumor metastasis 23"28 , meningitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
  • This invention provides compounds which bind to VLA-4. Such compounds can be used, for example, to assay for the presence of VLA-4 in a sample and, in pharmaceutical compositions, to inhibit cellular adhesion mediated by VLA-4, for example, binding of VCAM-1 to VLA-4.
  • the compounds of this invention have a binding affinity to VLA-4 as expressed by an I Q of about 15 ⁇ M or less (as measured using the procesure shown in Example 46 below) which compounds are defined by formula I below:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl, and R 1 and R 2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R 2 and the S0 2 group bound to R 1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic and where R 2 and R 3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R 2 and the carbon atom bound to R 3 can form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or a unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group;
  • Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
  • Q is -C(X)NR 7 - wherein R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; and X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
  • R 5 is -CH 2 X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, carboxy 1-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy lheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy lheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, with the further provisos that:
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5' where R 5' is -0-Z-NR 8 R 8' or -O-Z-R 12 wherein R 8 and R 8 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic, and R 8 and R 8 can be joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R 12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycles and substituted heterocycles, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -SQ-, Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5' where R 5' is -NR 12 C(Z')NR 8 R 8 or -NR 12 C(Z)R 13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR 12 , R 12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R 8 and R 8 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted a ⁇ kyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R 8 and R 8 is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic other than morpholino and thiomorpholino, or substituted heterocyclic or R 8 and R 8 can be joined to form a saturated heterocycle other than morpholino
  • Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
  • R 5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH 2 -) to the carbon atom to which it is attached;
  • X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxy carbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, cycloalkyl
  • each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamin
  • each R" is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when each R" is substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substit
  • substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
  • each R" ' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, al
  • R 18 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R 22 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic;
  • R 19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R 19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic: (r) -NR'C(0)OR 19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and R 19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloal
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5" where R 5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino,
  • R 1 and R 2 are joined together with the S0 2 and nitrogen atom to which they are attached respectively to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R 3 is hydrogen, and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R 5 is not benzyl; and
  • the compounds of this invention can also be provided as prodrugs which convert (e.g., hydrolyze, metabolize, etc.) in vivo to a compound of formula I above.
  • the carboxylic acid in the compound of formula I is modified into a group which, in vivo, will convert to the carboxylic acid (including salts thereof).
  • prodrugs are represented by compounds of formula IA:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and R 1 and R 2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R 2 and the S0 2 group bound to R 1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroary
  • R 9 is selected from the group consisting of -C(0)-aryl and -C(0)-substituted aryl and R 10 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and -CH 2 COOR ⁇ where R 11 is alkyl, and - NHS0 2 Z" where Z" is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
  • Q is -C(X)NR 7 - wherein R 7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; and X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
  • R 5 is -CH 2 X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy Iheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the further provisos that:
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ).-Ar-R 5 where R 5' is selected from the group consisting of -0-Z-NR 8 R 8' and -O-Z-R 12 wherein R 8 and R 8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, and where R 8 and R 8' are joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R 12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycle and substituted heterocycle, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -S0 2 -,
  • Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5' where R 5' is selected from the group consisting of -NR 1 C(Z')NR 8 R 8' and -NR 12 C(Z')R 13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR 12 , R 12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R 8 and R 8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R 8 and R 8' is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocycl
  • Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
  • R 5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH 2 -) to the carbon atom to which it is attached;
  • X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxycarbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxycarbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, cycloal
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5" where R 5 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of:
  • substituted alkylcarbonylamino with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Ihetero
  • each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substitute
  • substituted aryloxy and substituted heteroaryloxy with the proviso that at least one substituent on the substituted aryloxy /heteroaryloxy is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1 ,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
  • substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclic, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
  • each R' " is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxyethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkyl
  • R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R 19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic:
  • R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and R 19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
  • R 5 is not -(CH 2 ) X -Ar-R 5" where R 5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothi
  • R 1 is ⁇ -carboxymethylphenyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 3 is hydrogen or methyl
  • R 5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R 6 is not -O-benzyl
  • R 1 and R 2 are joined to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R 3 is hydrogen or methyl, R 5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R 6 is not -O-benzyl;
  • R 1 is /?-methylphenyl
  • R 2 is hydrogen
  • R 5 is benzyl or /j-hydroxybenzyl
  • R 3 is -(CH 2 ) s C(0)0-t-butyl where s is 1 or 2
  • Q is -C(0)NH-, then R 6 is not -O-t-butyl;
  • R 1 is /?-methylphenyl
  • R 2 is methyl
  • R 5 is benzyl
  • R 3 is -CH( ⁇ ) 2
  • Q is -C(0)NH-
  • R 6 is not -O-benzyl
  • R 1 is /?-methylphenyl
  • R 2 is methyl
  • R 3 is methyl or t-butyl
  • R 5 is p- hydroxybenzyl
  • Q is -C(0)NH-
  • R 6 is not -O-t-butyl.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl.
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of 4-methylphenyl, methyl, benzyl, n-butyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, phenyl, 2,4,6- trimethylphenyl, 2-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl, 2-carboxyphenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 4- trifluoromethylphenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 4-(CH 3 C(0)NH- )phenyl, 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, isopropyl, 3,5-di- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4-t-butoxyphenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 2-thienyl, 1- N-methyl-3-methyl-5-chloropyrazol-4-yl, phenethyl,
  • R 2 is hydrogen, methyl, phenyl, benzyl, -(CH 2 ) 2 -2-thienyl, and -(CH 2 ) 2 - ⁇ .
  • R 1 and R 2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R 2 and the S0 2 group bound to R 1 are joined to form a heterocyclic group or substituted heterocyclic group.
  • Preferred heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic groups include those having from 5 to 7 ring atoms having 2 to 3 heteroatoms in the ring selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur which ring is optionally fused to another ring such as a phenyl or cyclohexyl ring to provide for a fused ring heterocycle of from 10 to 14 ring atoms having 2 to 4 heteroatoms in the ring selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.
  • Specifically preferred RVR 2 joined groups include, by way of example, benzisothiazolonyl (saccharin-2-yl).
  • R 3 includes all of the isomers arising by substitution with methyl, phenyl, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, -CH 2 CH 2 - COOH, -CH 2 -COOH, 2-amidoethyl, /.r ⁇ -butyl, t-butyl, -CH 2 0-benzyl and hydroxymethyl.
  • Q is preferably -C(0)NH- or -C(S)NH-.
  • R 5 is preferably selected from the group consisting of all possible isomers arising by substitution with the following groups: benzyl, (N-benzylimidazol-4- yl)methyl, (pyridin-2-yl)methyl, (pyridin-3-yl)methyl, (pyridin-4-yl)methyl, 4-[2- (pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-iodobenzyl, 4- cyanobenzyl, 4-(2-bromobenzamido)benzyl, 4-(pyridin-4-yl-C(0)NH-)benzyl, and 4- hydroxybenzyl.
  • R 6 is preferably 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran-3-yl
  • ester compounds recited above wherein one ester is replaced with another ester selected from the group consisting of methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, isobutyl ester, sec-butyl ester and tert-butyl ester.
  • This invention also provides methods for binding VLA-4 in a biological sample which method comprises contacting the biological sample with a compound of formula I or I A above under conditions wherein said compound binds to VLA-4. Certain of the compounds of formula I and IA above are also useful in reducing VLA-4 mediated inflammation in vivo.
  • compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of one or more of the compounds of formula I or IA above with the exception that F? and R 5 are derived from L-amino acids or other similarly configured starting materials. Alternatively, racemic mixtures can be used.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may be used to treat VLA-4 mediated disease conditions.
  • disease conditions include, by way of example, asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetis), inflammatory bowel disease (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis, memngitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
  • this invention also provides methods for the treatment of an inflammatory disease in a patient mediated by VLA-4 which methods comprise administering to the patient the pharmaceutical compositions described above.
  • this invention relates to compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion and, in particular, leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4.
  • VLA-4 leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4.
  • alkyl refers to alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, t-butyl, n-heptyl, octyl and the like.
  • Substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxylaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl
  • Alkoxy refers to the group “alky 1-0- " which includes, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, z ' s ⁇ -propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • Substituted alkoxy refers to the group “substituted alkyl-O-" .
  • Acyl refers to the groups H-C(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl- C(O)-, alkenyl-C(O)-, substituted alkenyl-C(O)-, alkynyl-C(O)-, substituted alkynyl-C(O)- cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, substituted aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)-, substituted heteroaryl-C(O), heterocyclic-C(O)-, and substituted heterocyclic-C(O)- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, substitute
  • Acylamino refers to the group -C(0)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where each R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Thiocarbonylamino refers to the group -C(S)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where each R is joined to form, together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • alkenyl-C(0)0- substituted alkenyl-C(0)0-, alkynyl-C(0)0-, substituted alkynyl-C(0)0-, aryl-C(0)0-, substituted aryl-C(0)0-, cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, heteroaryl-C(0)0-, substituted heteroaryl-C(0)0-, heterocyclic-C(0)0-, and substituted heterocyclic-C(0)0-
  • alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Alkenyl refers to alkenyl group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation.
  • Substituted alkenyl refers to alkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroary
  • Substituted alkynyl refers to alkynyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted
  • -NRS(0) 2 -substituted heterocyclic -NRS(0) 2 -NR-alkyl, -NRS(0) 2 -NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0) 2 -NR-aryl, -NRS(0) 2 -NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0) 2 -NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0) 2 -NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0) 2 - NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0) 2 -NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and
  • jAminoacyl refers to the groups -NRC(0)alkyl
  • R is hydrogen or alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted
  • Aminocarbonyloxy refers to the groups -NRC(0)0-alkyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkyl, -NRC(0)0-alkenyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(0)0-alkynyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkynyl, -NRC(0)0- cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)0-aryl, -NRC(0)0- substituted aryl, -NRC(0)0-heteroaryl, -NRC(0)0-substituted heteroaryl,
  • R is hydrogen or alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Oxycarbonylamino refers to the groups -OC(0)NH 2 , -OC(0)NRR, -OC(0)NR-alkyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted alkyl, -OC(0)NR- alkenyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted alkenyl, -OC(0)NR-alkynyl, -OC(0)NR- substituted alkynyl, -OC(0)NR-cycloalkyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -OC(0)NR-aryl, -OC(0)NR-substituted aryl, -OC(0)NR- heteroaryl, -OC(0)NR-substituted heteroaryl,- OC(0)NR-heterocyclic, and -OC(0)NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl or where each R is joined to form, together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring and wherein alky
  • Oxythiocarbonylamino refers to the groups -OC(S)NH 2 , -OC(S)NRR, -OC(S)NR-alkyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted alkyl, -OC(S)NR- alkenyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted alkenyl, -OC(S)NR-alkynyl, -OC(S)NR- substituted alkynyl, -OC(S)NR-cycloalkyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -OC(S)NR-aryl, -OC(S)NR-substituted aryl, -OC(S)NR- heteroaryl, -OC(S)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -OC(S)NR-heterocyclic, and
  • R is hydrogen, alkyl or where each R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Aminocarbonylamino refers to the groups -NRC(0)NRR, -NRC(0)NR-alkyl, -NRC(0)NR-substituted alkyl, -NRC(0)NR-alkenyl, -NRC(0)NR-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(0)NR-alkynyl,
  • R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring as well as where one of the amino groups is blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • conventional blocking groups such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like
  • “Ammothiocarbonylamino” refers to the groups -NRC(S)NRR, -NRC(S)NR-alkyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted alkyl, -NRC(S)NR-alkenyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(S)NR-alkynyl, -NRC(S)NR- substituted alkynyl, -NRC(S)NR-aryl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted aryl, -NRC(S)NR-cycloalkyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(S)NR- heteroaryl, and -NRC(S)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(S)NR- heterocyclic, and -NRC(S)NR-substituted heteroaryl,
  • Aryl or “Ar” refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl) which condensed rings may or may not be aromatic (e.g., 2-benzoxazolinone, 2H-l,4-benzoxazin-3(4H)- one-7yl, and the like).
  • Preferred aryls include phenyl and naphthyl.
  • Substituted aryl refers to aryl groups which are substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-
  • Aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- which includes, by way of example, phenoxy, naphthoxy, and the like.
  • Substituted aryloxy refers to substituted aryl-O- groups.
  • Aryloxyaryl refers to the group -aryl-O-aryl.
  • Substituted aryloxyaryl refers to aryloxyaryl groups substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents on either or both aryl rings selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl
  • Cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring including, by way of example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl and the like. Excluded from this definition are multi-ring alkyl groups such as adamantanyl, etc.
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms having single or multiple unsaturation but which are not aromatic.
  • Cycloalkoxy refers to -O-cycloalkyl groups.
  • Substituted cycloalkoxy refers to -O-substituted cycloalkyl groups.
  • each R is independently hydrogen and alkyl as well as where one of the amino groups is blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, ary
  • each R is independently hydrogen and alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Halo or halogen refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either chloro or bromo.
  • Heteroaryl refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within the ring.
  • Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl).
  • Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl and furyl.
  • Substituted heteroaryl refers to heteroaryl groups which are substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl-cycl
  • Heteroaryloxy refers to the group -O-heteroaryl and "substituted heteroaryloxy” refers to the group -O-substituted heteroaryl.
  • Heterocycle or “heterocyclic” refers to a saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring wherein, in fused ring systems, one or more the rings can be aryl or heteroaryl.
  • “Saturated heterocyclic” refers to heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings lacking unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
  • Unsaturated heterocyclic refers to non-aromatic heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings having unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
  • heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azetidine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline , 4,5
  • “Saturated substituted heterocyclic” refers to substituted heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings lacking unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
  • Unsaturated substituted heterocyclic refers to non-aromatic substituted heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings having unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
  • Heterocyclyloxy refers to the group -O-heterocyclic and "substituted heterocyclyloxy” refers to the group -O-substituted heterocyclic.
  • Thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • Thioalkyl refers to the groups -S-alkyl.
  • Substituted thioalkyl refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • Thiocycloalkyl refers to the groups -S-cycloalkyl.
  • Substituted thiocycloalkyl refers to the group -S-substituted cycloalkyl.
  • Thioaryl refers to the group -S-aryl and "substituted thioaryl” refers to the group -S-substituted aryl.
  • Thioheteroaryl refers to the group -S-heteroaryl and "substituted thioheteroaryl” refers to the group -S-substituted heteroaryl.
  • Thioheterocyclic refers to the group -S-heterocyclic and "substituted thioheterocyclic” refers to the group -S-substituted heterocyclic.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formula I or IA which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
  • the compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
  • protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions.
  • Suitable protecting groups for various functional groups as well as suitable conditions for protecting and deprotecting particular functional groups are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
  • the compounds of this invention will typically contain one or more chiral centers. Accordingly, if desired, such compounds can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e., as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures. All such stereoisomers (and enriched mixtures) are included within the scope of this invention, unless otherwise indicated. Pure stereoisomers (or enriched mixtures) may be prepared using, for example, optically active starting materials or stereoselective reagents well-known in the art. Alternatively, racemic mixtures of such compounds can be separated using, for example, chiral column chromatography, chiral resolving agents and the like.
  • R -R 3 are as defined above.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino acid of formula II with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 2 equivalents, of sulfonyl chloride III in an inert diluent such as dichloromethane and the like. Generally, the reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about -70 °C to about 40 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours. Preferably, this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like.
  • reaction can be conducted under Schotten-Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like, as the base.
  • aqueous alkali such as sodium hydroxide and the like
  • the resulting N-sulfonyl amino acid IV is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
  • amino acids of formula II employed in the above reaction are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures.
  • suitable amino acids for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, glycine, 2-tert-butylglycine, D,L-phenylglycine, L-alanine, ⁇ -methylalanine, N- methyl-L-phenylalanine, L-diphenylalanine, sarcosine, D,L- phenylsarcosine, L-aspartic acid ⁇ -tert-butyl ester, L-glutamic acid ⁇ -tert- butyl ester, L-(0-be ⁇ zyl)serine, 1-aminocyclopropanecarboxylic acid, 1- aminocyclobutanecarboxylic acid, 1-aminocyclopentanecarboxylic acid
  • the sulfonyl chlorides of formula III employed in the above reaction are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures. Such compounds are typically prepared from the corresponding sulfonic acid, i.e., from compounds of the formula R 1 -S0 3 H where R 1 is as defined above, using phosphorous trichloride and phosphorous pentachloride.
  • This reaction is generally conducted by contacting the sulfonic acid with about 2 to 5 molar equivalents of phosphorous trichloride and phosphorous pentachloride, either neat or in an inert solvent, such as dichloromethane, at temperature in the range of about 0°C to about 80 °C for about 1 to about 48 hours to afford the sulfonyl chloride.
  • the sulfonyl chlorides of formula III can be prepared from the corresponding thiol compound, i.e., from compounds of the formula R'-SH where R 1 is as defined above, by treating the thiol with chlorine (Cy and water under conventional reaction conditions.
  • sulfonyl chlorides suitable for use in this invention include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, 2-propanesulfonyl chloride, 1-butanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulf onyl chloride, 1- naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, 2-naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, p- toluenesulfonyl chloride, ⁇ -toluenesulfonyl chloride, 4- acetamidobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-amidinobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4- tert-butylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-bromobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 2- carboxybenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-cyanobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 3,4- dichlorobenzenesulfonyl chlor
  • a sulfonyl fluoride, sulfonyl bromide or sulfonic acid anhydride may be used in place of the sulfonyl chloride in the above reaction to form the N-sulfonyl amino acids of formula IV.
  • R ⁇ SO.- ⁇ H-R 2 V wherein R 1 and R 2 are as defined above, with a carboxylic acid derivative of the formula L(R 3 )CHCOOR where L is a leaving group, such as chloro, bromo, iodo, mesylate, tosylate and the like, R 3 is as defined above and R is hydrogen or an alkyl group.
  • L is a leaving group, such as chloro, bromo, iodo, mesylate, tosylate and the like
  • R 3 is as defined above and R is hydrogen or an alkyl group.
  • R 5 -R 7 are as defined above.
  • This coupling reaction is typically conducted using well-known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides, BOP reagent (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphonate) and the like.
  • Suitable carbodiimides include, by way of example, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) and the like.
  • polymer supported forms of carbodiimide coupling reagents may also be used including, for example, those described in Tetrahedron Letters, 34(48), 7685 (1993).
  • well-known coupling promoters such as N-hy droxy succinimide, 1-hy droxy benzotriazole and the like, may be used to facilitate the coupling reaction.
  • This coupling reaction is typically conducted by contacting the N- sulfonylamino acid IV with about 1 to about 2 equivalents of the coupling reagent and at least one equivalent, preferably about 1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of amino acid derivative VI in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N- dimethy If ormamide and the like.
  • an inert diluent such as dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N- dimethy If ormamide and the like.
  • this reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about, 37 °C for about 12 to about 24 hours.
  • the compound of formula I is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
  • the N-sulfonyl amino acid IV can be converted into an acid halide and the acid halide coupled with amino acid derivative VI to provide compounds of formula I.
  • the acid halide of VI can be prepared by contacting VI with an inorganic acid halide, such as thionyl chloride, phosphorous trichloride, phosphorous tribromide or phosphorous pentachloride, or preferably, with oxalyl chloride under conventional conditions.
  • this reaction is conducted using about 1 to 5 molar equivalents of the inorganic acid halide or oxalyl chloride, either neat or in an inert solvent, such as dichloromethane or carbon tetrachloride, at temperature in the range of about 0°C to about 80°C for about 1 to about 48 hours.
  • a catalyst such as N,N-dimethy If ormamide, may also be used in this reaction.
  • the acid halide of N-sulfonyl amino acid IV is then contacted with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents, of amino acid derivative VI in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -70 °C to about 40 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours.
  • this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction.
  • Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like.
  • reaction can be conducted under Schotten-Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like.
  • aqueous alkali such as sodium hydroxide and the like.
  • the compound of formula I is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
  • the compounds of formula I can be prepared by first forming a diamino acid derivative of formula VII:
  • amino acid derivatives of formula VI employed in the above reactions are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures.
  • amino acid derivatives of formula VI can be prepared by C- alkylating commercially available diethyl 2-acetamidomalonate (Aldrich,
  • amino acid derivatives of formula VI suitable for use in the above reactions include, but are not limited to, L-alanine methyl ester, L-isoleucine methyl ester, L-leucine methyl ester, L-valine methyl ester, ⁇ -tert-butyl-L-aspartic acid methyl ester, L-asparagine tert-butyl ester, e-Boc-L-lysine methyl ester, e-Cbz-L-lysine methyl ester, y-tert- butyl-L-glutamic acid methyl ester, L-glutamine tert-butyl ester, L-(N- methyl)histidine methyl ester, L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester, L- methionine methyl ester, L-(O-benzyl)serine methyl ester, L-tryptophan methyl ester, L-phenylalanine methyl ester
  • the compounds of formula I are typically prepared as an ester, i.e., where R 6 is an alkoxy or substituted alkoxy group and the like.
  • the ester group can be hydrolysed using conventional conditions and reagents to provide the corresponding carboxylic acid.
  • this reaction is conducted by treating the ester with at least one equivalent of an alkali metal hydroxide, such as lithium, sodium or potassium hydroxide, in an inert diluent, such as methanol or mixtures of methanol and water, at a temperature ranging about 0°C to about 24°C for about 1 to about 12 hours.
  • benzyl esters may be removed by hydrogenolysis using a palladium catalyst, such as palladium on carbon.
  • the resulting carboxylic acids may be coupled, if desired, to amines such as ⁇ -alanine ethyl ester, hydroxyamines such as hydroxylamine and N-hy droxy succinimide, alkoxyamines and substituted alkoxyamines such as O-methylhydroxylamine and O- benzylhydroxylamine, and the like, using conventional coupling reagents and conditions as described above.
  • a nitro group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof may be readily reduced by hydrogenation in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as palladium on carbon, to provide the corresponding amino group.
  • a palladium catalyst such as palladium on carbon
  • This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature of from about 20°C to about 50°C for about 6 to about 24 hours in an inert diluent, such as methanol.
  • Compounds having a nitro group on the R 5 substituent can be prepared, for example, by using a 4- nitrophenylalanine derivative and the like in the above-described coupling reactions.
  • a pyridyl group can be hydrogenated in the presence of a platinum catalyst, such as platinum oxide, in an acidic diluent to provide the corresponding piperidinyl analogue.
  • a platinum catalyst such as platinum oxide
  • this reaction is conducted by treating the pyridine compound with hydrogen at a pressure ranging from about 20 psi to about 60 psi, preferably about 40 psi, in the presence of the catalyst at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 50 °C for about 2 to about 24 hours in an acidic diluent, such as a mixture of methanol and aqueous hydrochloric acid.
  • R 5 substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof contains a primary or secondary amino group
  • such amino groups can be further derivatized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide, by way of example, amides, sulfonamides, ureas, thioureas, carbamates, secondary or tertiary amines and the like.
  • Compounds having a primary amino group on the R 5 substituent may be prepared, for example, by reduction of the corresponding nitro compound as described above.
  • such compounds can be prepared by using an amino acid derivative of formula VI derived from lysine, 4- aminophenylalanine and the like in the above-described coupling reactions.
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing a primary or secondary amino group such as where R 5 is a (4-aminophenyl)methyl group
  • R 5 is a (4-aminophenyl)methyl group
  • This acylation reaction is typically conducted by treating the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of a carboxylic acid in the presence of a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, BOP reagent (benzotriazol-1- yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphonate) and the like, in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 37 °C for about 4 to about 24 hours.
  • a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, BOP reagent (benzotriazol-1- yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphonate) and the like
  • a promoter such as N-hy droxy succinimide, 1-hydroxy- benzotriazole and the like, is used to facilitate the acylation reaction.
  • carboxylic acids suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, N-tert-buty loxycarbonylglycine, N-tert- buty loxy carbonyl-L-pheny lalanine , N-tert-buty loxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid benzyl ester, benzoic acid, N-tert-buty loxy carbonylisonipecotic acid, N- methylisonipecotic acid, N-tert-buty loxycarbonylnipecotic acid, N-tert- butyloxycarbonyl-L-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid, N-(toluene-4- sulfonyl)-L-proline and the like.
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a primary or secondary amino group can be N-acylated using an acyl halide or a carboxylic acid anhydride to form the corresponding amide.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of the acyl halide or carboxylic acid anhydride in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about of about -70°C to about 40°C for about 1 to about 24 hours.
  • an acylation catalyst such as 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)pyridine may be used to promote the acylation reaction.
  • the acylation reaction is preferably conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction.
  • suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamme, N-methylmorpholine and the like.
  • the reaction can be conducted under Schotten- Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like.
  • acyl halides and carboxylic acid anhydrides suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, 2-methylpropionyl chloride, trimethylacetyl chloride, phenylacetyl chloride, benzoyl chloride, 2-bromobenzoyl chloride, 2-methylbenzoyl chloride, 2-trifluoro- methylbenzoyl chloride, isonicotinoyl chloride, nicotinoyl chloride, picolinoyl chloride, acetic anhydride, succinic anhydride, and the like.
  • Carbamyl chlorides such as N,N-dimethylcarbamyl chloride, N,N- diethylcarbamyl chloride and the like, can also be used in this reaction to provide ureas.
  • dicarbonates such as di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, may be employed to provide carbamates.
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a primary or secondary amino group may be N- sulfonated to form a sulfonamide using a sulfonyl halide or a sulfonic acid anhydride.
  • Sulfonyl halides and sulfonic acid anhydrides suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, chloromethanesulfonyl chloride, /?-toluenesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride, and the like.
  • sulfamoyl chlorides such as dimethylsulfamoyl chloride, can be used to provide sulfamides (e.g., > N-S0 2 -N ⁇ ) .
  • a primary and secondary amino group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof can be reacted with an isocyanate or a thioisocyanate to give a urea or thiourea, respectively.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of the isocyanate or thioisocyanate in an inert diluent, such as toluene and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 24 °C to about 37 °C for about 12 to about 24 hours.
  • the isocyanates and thioisocyanates used in this reaction are commercially available or can be prepared from commercially available compounds using well-known synthetic procedures.
  • isocyanates and thioisocyanates are readily prepared by reacting the appropriate amine with phosgene or thiophosgene.
  • isocyanates and thioisocyanates suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, ethyl isocyanate, n-propyl isocyanate, 4-cyanophenyl isocyanate, 3-methoxyphenyl isocyanate, 2-phenylethyl isocyanate, methyl thioisocyanate, ethyl thioisocyanate, 2-phenylethyl thioisocyanate, 3- phenylpropyl thioisocyanate, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)propyl thioisocyanate, phenyl thioisocyanate, benzyl thioisocyanate, 3-pyridyl thioisocyanate, fluorescein isothiocyanate (isomer I
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof contains a primary or secondary amino group
  • the amino group can be reductively alkylated using aldehydes or ketones to form a secondary or tertiary amino group.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents, of an aldehyde or ketone and at least one equivalent based on the amino compound of a metal hydride reducing agent, such as sodium cyanoborohydride, in an inert diluent, such as methanol, tetrahydrofuran, mixtures thereof and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 1 to about 72 hours.
  • Aldehydes and ketones suitable for use in this reaction include, by way of example, benzaldehyde, 4-chlorobenzaldehyde, valeraldehyde and the like.
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof has a substituent containing a hydroxyl group
  • the hydroxyl group can be further modified or derivatized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide, by way of example, ethers, carbamates and the like.
  • Compounds having a hydroxyl group on the R 5 substituent can be prepared using an amino acid derivative of formula VI derived from tyrosine and the like in the above-described reactions.
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing a hydroxyl group can be readily O-alkylated to form ethers.
  • This O-alkylation reaction is typically conducted by contacting the hydroxy compound with a suitable alkali or alkaline earth metal base, such as potassium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as acetone, 2-butanone and the like, to form the alkali or alkaline earth metal salt of the hydroxyl group.
  • This salt is generally not isolated, but is reacted in situ with at least one equivalent of an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide or sulfonate, such as an alkyl chloride, bromide, iodide, mesylate or tosylate, to afford the ether.
  • an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide or sulfonate such as an alkyl chloride, bromide, iodide, mesylate or tosylate
  • this reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about 60°C to about 150°C for about 24 to about 72 hours.
  • a catalytic amount of sodium or potassium iodide is added to the reaction mixture when an alkyl chloride or bromide is employed in the reaction.
  • alkyl or substituted alkyl halides and sulfonates suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, tert-butyl bromoacetate, N-tert-butyl chloroacetamide, 1-bromoethylbenzene, ethyl ⁇ - bromophenylacetate, 2-(N-ethyl-N-phenylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N- ethylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N-diisopropylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N- dibenzylamino)ethyl chloride, 3-(N,N-ethylamino)propyl chloride, 3-(N- benzyl-N-methylamino)propyl chloride, N-(2-chloroethyl)mo holine, 2-
  • a hydroxyl group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof can be O-alkylating using the Mitsunobu reaction.
  • an alcohol such as 3-(N,N- dimethylamino)-l-propanol and the like
  • triphenylphosphine is reacted with about 1.0 to about 1.3 equivalents of triphenylphosphine and about 1.0 to about 1.3 equivalents of diethyl azodicarboxylate in an inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from about -10°C to about 5°C for about 0.25 to about 1 hour.
  • a hydroxy compound such as N-tert-buty Ityrosine methyl ester
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a aryl hydroxy group can be reacted with an aryl iodide to provide a diaryl ether.
  • this reaction is conducted by forming the alkali metal salt of the hydroxyl group using a suitable base, such as sodium hydride, in an inert diluent such as xylenes at a temperature of about -25 °C to about 10°C.
  • the salt is then treated with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of cuprous bromide dimethyl sulfide complex at a temperature ranging from about 10°C to about 30 °C for about 0.5 to about
  • a hydroxy-containing compound can also be readily derivatized to form a carbamate.
  • a hydroxy compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof is contacted with about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -25 °C to about 0°C for about 0.5 to about 2.0 hours.
  • Treatment of the resulting carbonate with an excess, preferably about 2 to about 5 equivalents, of a trialkylamine, such as triethylamine, for about 0.5 to 2 hours, followed by about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a primary or secondary amine provides the carbamate.
  • amines suitable for using in this reaction include, but are not limited to, piperazine, 1-methylpiperazine, 1-acetylpiperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and the like.
  • a hydroxy-containing compound is contacted with about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a carbamyl chloride in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about 25 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 to about 72 hours.
  • this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction.
  • suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like.
  • At least one equivalent (based on the hydroxy compound) of 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)pyridine is preferably added to the reaction mixture to facilitate the reaction.
  • carbamyl chlorides suitable for use in this reaction include, by way of example, dimethylcarbamyl chloride, diethylcarbamyl chloride and the like.
  • hydroxyl groups can be readily converted into a leaving group and displaced to form, for example, amines, sulfides and fluorides.
  • derivatives of 4- hy droxy -L-proline can be converted into the corresponding 4-amino, 4-thio or 4-fluoro-L-proline derivatives via nucleophilic displacement of the derivatized hydroxyl group.
  • the stereochemistry at the carbon atom attached to the derivatized hydroxyl group is typically inverted.
  • These reactions are typically conducted by first converting the hydroxyl group into a leaving group, such as a tosylate, by treatment of the hydroxy compound with at least one equivalent of a sulfonyl halide, such as / oluenesulfonyl chloride and the like, in pyridine. This reaction is generally conducted at a temperature of from about 0°C to about 70 °C for about 1 to about 48 hours.
  • the resulting tosylate can then be readily displaced with sodium azide, for example, by contacting the tosylate with at least one equivalent of sodium azide in an inert diluent, such as a mixture of N,N-dimethy If ormamide and water, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 37 °C for about 1 to about 12 hours to provide the corresponding azido compound.
  • an inert diluent such as a mixture of N,N-dimethy If ormamide and water
  • the azido group can then be reduced by, for example, hydrogenation using a palladium on carbon catalyst to provide the amino (-NH 2 ) compound.
  • a tosylate group can be readily displaced by a thiol to form a sulfide.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the tosylate with at least one equivalent of a thiol, such as thiophenol, in the presence of a suitable base, such as l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU), in an inert diluent, such as N,N-dimethylformamide, at a temperature of from about 0°C to about 37°C for about 1 to about 12 hours to provide the sulfide.
  • a suitable base such as l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU)
  • DBU l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene
  • a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing an iodoaryl group for example, when R? is a (4-iodophenyl)methyl group, can be readily converted either before or after the above coupling reactions into a biaryl compound.
  • this reaction is conducted by treating the iodoaryl compound with about 1.1 to about 2 equivalents of an arylzinc iodide, such as 2-
  • the compounds of formula I or I A or intermediates thereof may contain substituents having one or more sulfur atoms.
  • sulfur atoms will be present, for example, when the amino acid of formula II employed in the above reactions is derived from L-thiazolidine-4- carboxylic acid, L-(5,5-dimethyl)thiazolidine-4-carboxylic acid, L- thiamo ⁇ holine-3 -carboxylic acid and the like.
  • sulfur atoms can be oxidized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide a sulfoxide or sulfone compound using conventional reagents and reaction conditions.
  • Suitable reagents for oxidizing a sulfide compound to a sulfoxide include, by way of example, hydrogen peroxide, 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid (MCPBA), sodium periodate and the like.
  • the oxidation reaction is typically conducted by contacting the sulfide compound with about 0.95 to about 1.1 equivalents of the oxidizing reagent in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -50 °C to about 75 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours.
  • the resulting sulfoxide can then be further oxidized to the corresponding sulfone by contacting the sulfoxide with at least one additional equivalent of an oxidizing reagent, such as hydrogen peroxide, MCPBA, potassium permanganate and the like.
  • an oxidizing reagent such as hydrogen peroxide, MCPBA, potassium permanganate and the like.
  • the sulfone can be prepared directly by contacting the sulfide with at least two equivalents, and preferably an excess, of the oxidizing reagent.
  • Such reactions are described further in March, "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 4th Ed., pp. 1201-1202, Wiley Publisher, 1992.
  • the compounds of formula I having an R 2 substituent other an hydrogen can be prepared using an N-substituted amino acid of formula II, such as sarcosine, N-methyl-L-pheny lalanine and the like, in the above-described coupling reactions.
  • N-substituted amino acid of formula II such as sarcosine, N-methyl-L-pheny lalanine and the like
  • such compounds can be prepared by N-alkylation of a sulfonamide of formula I or IV (where R 2 is hydrogen) using conventional synthetic procedures.
  • this N-alkylation reaction is conducted by contacting the sulfonamide with at least one equivalent, preferably 1.1 to 2 equivalents, of an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide in the presence of a suitable base, such as potassium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as acetone, 2-butanone and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 25 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 to about 48 hours.
  • a suitable base such as potassium carbonate
  • an inert diluent such as acetone, 2-butanone and the like
  • the sulfonamides of formula I or IV wherein R 2 is hydrogen and R 1 is a 2-alkoxycarbonylaryl group can be intramolecularly cyclized to form 1 ,2-benzisothiazol-3-one derivatives or analogues thereof.
  • This reaction is typically conducted by treating a sulfonamide, such as N- (2-methoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl)glycine-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester, with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as an alkali metal hydride, in a inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 30 °C for about 2 to about 48 hours to afford the cyclized 1 ,2-benzisothiazol-3-one derivative.
  • a sulfonamide such as N- (2-methoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl)glycine-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
  • a suitable base such as an alkali metal hydride
  • a inert diluent such as tetrahydrofuran
  • the compounds of formula I where Q is -C(S) ⁇ R 7 - are can prepared by using an amino thionoacid derivative in place of amino acid II in the above described synthetic procedures.
  • amino thionoacid derivatives can be prepared by the procedures described in Shalaky, et al., J. Org. Chem., 61:9045-9048 (1996) and Brain, et al., J. Org. Chem.,
  • the compounds of formula I and IA are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi- solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • the active compound In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhy droxy - benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face masks tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
  • the above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • a tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
  • Stearic acid 5.0 The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
  • the active mixture is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
  • Formulation Example 4 Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
  • the active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly.
  • the solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60 °C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 150 mg.
  • Capsules each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
  • Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
  • the active ingredient, cellulose, starch, an magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
  • Suppositories each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • the medicament, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water.
  • the sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • the active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 560 mg quantities.
  • An intravenous formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • the construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Direct techniques can be used when it is desirable or necessary to introduce the pharmaceutical composition to the brain, either directly or indirectly. Direct techniques usually involve placement of a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier.
  • a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier.
  • One such implantable delivery system used for the transport of biological factors to specific anatomical regions of the body is described in U.S. Patent 5,011,472 which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference.
  • Indirect techniques usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs.
  • Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier.
  • the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
  • the compounds of this invention can be employed to bind VLA-4 ⁇ ! integrin) in biological samples and, accordingly have utility in, for example, assaying such samples for VLA-4.
  • the compounds can be bound to a solid support and the VLA-4 sample added thereto.
  • the amount of VLA-4 in the sample can be determined by conventional methods such as use of a sandwich ELISA assay.
  • labeled VLA-4 can be used in a competitive binding assay to measure for the presence of VLA-4 in the sample.
  • Other suitable assays are well known in the art.
  • certain of the compounds of this invention inhibit, in vivo, adhesion of leukocytes to endothelial cells mediated by VLA-4 and, accordingly, can be used in the treatment of diseases mediated by VLA-4.
  • diseases include inflammatory diseases in mammalian patients such as asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetes), inflammatory bowel disease (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis, meningitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
  • the biological activity of the compounds identified above may be assayed in a variety of systems.
  • a compound can be immobilized on a solid surface and adhesion of cells expressing VLA-4 can be measured. Using such formats, large numbers of compounds can be screened.
  • Cells suitable for this assay include any leukocytes known to express VLA-4 such as T cells, B cells, monocytes, eosinophils, and basophils.
  • a number of leukocyte cell lines can also be used, examples include Jurkat and U937.
  • test compounds can also be tested for the ability to competitively inhibit binding between VLA-4 and VCAM-1, or between VLA-4 and a labeled compound known to bind VLA-4 such as a compound of this invention or antibodies to VLA-4.
  • the VCAM-1 can be immobilized on a solid surface.
  • VCAM-1 may also be expressed as a recombinant fusion protein having an Ig tail (e.g., IgG) so that binding to VLA-4 may be detected in an immunoassay.
  • VCAM-1 expressing cells such as activated endothelial cells or VCAM-1 transfected fibroblasts can be used.
  • the assays described in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 91/05038 are particularly preferred. This application is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the labelling systems can be in a variety of forms.
  • the label may be coupled directly or indirectly to the desired component of the assay according to methods well known in the art.
  • a wide variety of labels may be used.
  • the component may be labelled by any one of several methods. The most common method of detection is the use of autoradiography with 3 H, 1 5 1, 35 S, 14 C, or 32 P labelled compounds and the like.
  • Non-radioactive labels include ligands which bind to labelled antibodies, fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes and antibodies which can serve as specific binding pair members for a labelled ligand.
  • the choice of label depends on sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the compound, stability requirements, and available instrumentation.
  • EAE experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • Compounds having the desired biological activity may be modified as necessary to provide desired properties such as improved pharmacological properties (e.g., in vivo stability, bio-availability), or the ability to be detected in diagnostic applications.
  • desired properties such as improved pharmacological properties (e.g., in vivo stability, bio-availability), or the ability to be detected in diagnostic applications.
  • inclusion of one or more D-amino acids in the sulfonamides of this invention typically increases in vivo stability. Stability can be assayed in a variety of ways such as by measuring the half-life of the proteins during incubation with peptidases or human plasma or serum. A number of such protein stability assays have been described (see, e.g., Verhoef et al., Eur. J. Drug Metab. Pharmacokinet., 1990, 15i2):83-93).
  • the compounds of the subject invention may be modified in a variety of ways for a variety of end pu ⁇ oses while still retaining biological activity.
  • various reactive sites may be introduced at the terminus for linking to particles, solid substrates, macromolecules, and the like.
  • Labeled compounds can be used in a variety of in vivo or in vitro applications.
  • a wide variety of labels may be employed, such as radionuclides (e.g., gamma-emitting radioisotopes such as technetium-99 or indium-Ill), fluorescers (e.g., fluorescein), enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chemiluminescent compounds, bioluminescent compounds, and the like.
  • radionuclides e.g., gamma-emitting radioisotopes such as technetium-99 or indium-Ill
  • fluorescers e.g., fluorescein
  • enzymes enzyme substrates
  • enzyme cofactors enzyme inhibitors
  • chemiluminescent compounds chemiluminescent compounds
  • bioluminescent compounds bioluminescent compounds
  • In vitro uses include diagnostic applications such as monitoring inflammatory responses by detecting the presence of leukocytes expressing VLA-4.
  • the compounds of this invention can also be used for isolating or labeling such cells.
  • the compounds of the invention can be used to assay for potential inhibitors of VLA-4/ VCAM-1 interactions.
  • radioisotopes are typically used in accordance with well known techniques.
  • the radioisotopes may be bound to the peptide either directly or indirectly using intermediate functional groups.
  • chelating agents such as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTP A) and ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and similar molecules have been used to bind proteins to metallic ion radioisotopes.
  • the complexes can also be labeled with a paramagnetic isotope for pu ⁇ oses of in vivo diagnosis, as in magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) or electron spin resonance (ESR), both of which are well known.
  • MRI magnetic resonance imaging
  • ESR electron spin resonance
  • any conventional method for visualizing diagnostic images can be used.
  • gamma- and positron-emitting radioisotopes are used for camera imaging and paramagnetic isotopes are used for MRI.
  • the compounds can be used to monitor the course of amelioration of an inflammatory response in an individual. By measuring the increase or decrease in lymphocytes expressing VLA-4 it is possible to determine whether a particular therapeutic regimen aimed at ameliorating the disease is effective.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be used to block or inhibit cellular adhesion associated with a number of diseases and disorders.
  • a number of inflammatory disorders are associated with integrins or leukocytes.
  • Treatable disorders include, e.g., transplantation rejection (e.g., allograft rejection), Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetes), retinitis, cancer metastases, rheumatoid arthritis, acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury (e.g., adult respiratory distress syndrome), asthma, nephritis, and acute and chronic inflammation, including atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia, and inflammatory bowel disease (including Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis).
  • the pharmaceutical compositions are used to treat inflammatory brain disorders, such as multiple sclerosis (MS), viral meningitis and encephalitis.
  • Inflammatory bowel disease is a collective term for two similar diseases referred to as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis.
  • Crohn's disease is an idiopathic, chronic ulceroconstrictive inflammatory disease characterized by sha ⁇ ly delimited and typically transmural involvement of all layers of the bowel wall by a granulomatous inflammatory reaction. Any segment of the gastrointestinal tract, from the mouth to the anus, may be involved, although the disease most commonly affects the terminal ileum and/or colon. Ulcerative colitis is an inflammatory response limited largely to the colonic mucosa and submucosa. Lymphocytes and macrophages are numerous in lesions of inflammatory bowel disease and may contribute to inflammatory injury.
  • Asthma is a disease characterized by increased responsiveness of the tracheobronchial tree to various stimuli potentiating paroxysmal constriction of the bronchial airways.
  • the stimuli cause release of various mediators of inflammation from IgE-coated mast cells including histamine, eosinophilic and neutrophilic chemotactic factors, leukotrines, prostaglandin and platelet activating factor. Release of these factors recruits basophils, eosinophils and neutrophils, which cause inflammatory injury.
  • Atherosclerosis is a disease of arteries (e.g., coronary, carotid, aorta and iliac).
  • the basic lesion, the atheroma consists of a raised focal plaque within the intima, having a core of lipid and a covering fibrous cap.
  • Atheromas compromise arterial blood flow and weaken affected arteries.
  • Myocardial and cerebral infarcts are a major consequence of this disease. Macrophages and leukocytes are recruited to atheromas and contribute to inflammatory injury.
  • Rheumatoid arthritis is a chronic, relapsing inflammatory disease that primarily causes impairment and destruction of joints. Rheumatoid arthritis usually first affects the small joints of the hands and feet but then may involve the wrists, elbows, ankles and knees. The arthritis results from interaction of synovial cells with leukocytes that infiltrate from the circulation into the synovial lining of the joints. See e.g., Paul, Immunology (3d ed., Raven Press, 1993).
  • CD8 + cells, CD4 cells and monocytes are all involved in the rejection of transplant tissues.
  • Compounds of this invention which bind to alpha-4 integrin are useful, inter alia, to block alloantigen-induced immune responses in the donee thereby preventing such cells from participating in the destruction of the transplanted tissue or organ. See, e.g., Paul et al., Transplant International 9, 420-425 (1996); Georczynski et al., Immunology 87, 573-580 (1996); Georcyznski et al., Transplant. Immunol. 3, 55-61 (1995); Yang et al. , Transplantation 60, 71-76 (1995); Anderson et al. , APMIS 102, 23-27 (1994).
  • GVHD graft versus host disease
  • Schlegel et al. J. Immunol. 155, 3856-3865 (1995).
  • GVHD is a potentially fatal disease that occurs when immunologically competent cells are transferred to an allogenetic recipient. In this situation, the donor's immunocompetent cells may attack tissues in the recipient. Tissues of the skin, gut epithelia and liver are frequent targets and may be destroyed during the course of GVHD.
  • the disease presents an especially severe problem when immune tissue is being transplanted, such as in bone marrow transplantation; but less severe GVHD has also been reported in other cases as well, including heart and liver transplants.
  • the therapeutic agents of the present invention are used, ter alia, to block activation of the donor T-cells thereby interfering with their ability to lyse target cells in the host.
  • a further use of the compounds of this invention is inhibiting tumor metastasis.
  • Several tumor cells have been reported to express VLA-4 and compounds which bind VLA-4 block adhesion of such cells to endothelial cells. Steinback et al., Urol. Res. 23, 175-83 (1995); Orosz et al., Int. J. Cancer 60, 867-71 (1995); Freedman et al., Leuk. Lymphoma 13, 47-52
  • a further use of the compounds of this invention is in treating multiple sclerosis.
  • Multiple sclerosis is a progressive neurological autoimmune disease that affects an estimated 250,000 to 350,000 people in the United
  • Multiple sclerosis is thought to be the result of a specific autoimmune reaction in which certain leukocytes attack and initiate the destruction of myelin, the insulating sheath covering nerve fibers.
  • murine monoclonal antibodies directed against VLA-4 have been shown to block the adhesion of leukocytes to the endothelium, and thus prevent inflammation of the central nervous system and subsequent paralysis in the animals 16 .
  • compositions of the invention are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems. Suitable formulations for use in the present invention are found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985).
  • the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds.
  • a variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871, 4,501,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference.
  • the amount administered to the patient will vary depending upon what is being administered, the pu ⁇ ose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like.
  • compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease and its complications.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as “therapeutically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the disease condition being treated as well as by the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the severity of the inflammation, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
  • compositions administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration.
  • the pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to
  • the therapeutic dosage of the compounds of the present invention will vary according to, for example, the particular use for which the treatment is made, the manner of administration of the compound, the health and condition of the patient, and the judgment of the prescribing physician.
  • the dose will typically be in the range of about 20 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g per kilogram body weight, preferably about 100 ⁇ g to about 300 ⁇ g per kilogram body weight.
  • Suitable dosage ranges for intranasal administration are generally about 0.1 pg to 1 mg per kilogram body weight.
  • Effective doses can be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
  • EDC l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
  • NMM N-methylmo ⁇ holine
  • Method 9 Reductive Amination Procedure Reductive amination of Tos-Pro-p-NH 2 -Phe with the appropriate aldehyde was conducted using acetic acid, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, methylene chloride and the combined mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography. Method 10 BOC Removal Procedure Anhydrous hydrochloride (HCl) gas was bubbled through a methanolic solution of the appropriate Boc-amino acid ester at 0°C for 15 minutes and the reaction mixture was stirred for three hours. The solution was concentrated to a syrup and dissolved in Et 2 0 and reconcentrated. This procedure was repeated and the resulting solid was placed under high vacuum overnight.
  • HCl anhydrous hydrochloride
  • N-methylmo ⁇ holine (1.1-2.2 equivalents) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (2 equivalents) were mixed, placed in an ice bath and l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide (1.1 equivalents) added.
  • the reaction was allowed to rise to room temperature and stirred overnight.
  • the reaction mixture was poured into H 2 0 and the organic phase was washed with sat. NaHC0 3 , brine, dried (MgS0 4 or Na 2 S0 4 ), filtered and concentrated.
  • the crude product was purified by column chromatography.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2S-indoline-2-carboxylic acid (331.2 mg, 1.04 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (5 mL) with 4-methyl mo ⁇ holine (3.5 eq, 400 ⁇ L), BOP (1.1 eq, 506 mg), and phenylalanine benzyl ester (1.0 eq, 444 mg).
  • the dipeptide was isolated as an oil.
  • the benzyl ester was dissolved in EtOH:H 2 0 (1:1) [2.5 mL] containing a catalytic amount of
  • the mixture was diluted with CH 2 C1 2 (40 mL) and washed with IN HCl (2 x 10 mL), IM ⁇ aHCQ, (15 mL), brine (10 mL), dried (MgS0 4 ), filtered and evaporated in vacuo.
  • the residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (3:2 Hexane/EtOAc) to give the dipeptide benzyl ester (0.51g, 50%).
  • the - benzyl ester was dissolved in THF (20 mL) and 10% Pd/C (60 mg) was added.
  • the mixture was hydrogenated at 15 psi H 2 for 1.5 hr.
  • Example 21 The product from Example 21 (180) (0.62 mmoles) was added to ethanol (40 mL) and 5% Pd-C (10%) and shaken under 35 psi hydrogen for
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was prepared from phenylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • N-Methyl-L-pheny lalanine 500 mg, 2.79 mmol was dissolved in IN ⁇ aOH (6 mL). Dioxane (9 mL)) was added, followed by -toluenesulfonyl chloride (532 mg, 2.79 mmol) and the mixture was vigorously stirred for 1 hr. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in water (30 mL) and washed with Et 2 0 (2 x 30 mL) before making acidic with IN HCl.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methylphenylalanine was coupled to L- phenylalanine ethyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 (400 mg, 62%).
  • the title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the ethyl ester using ⁇ aOH in ethanol. Proton and carbon ⁇ MR analyis indicated a mixture of diastereomers.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L- diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine was coupled to L-phenylalanine benzyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3.
  • the Boc group was removed by treatment with TFA and anisole, and the mixture was evaporated.
  • the residue was dissolved in Et 2 0 and washed with sat. NaHC0 3 and sat. NaCl.
  • the Et 2 0 layers were dried with MgS0 4 , filtered, and evaporated to give the deprotected dipeptide.
  • the resulting ester of the title compound was tosylated using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to 3-(3-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester dihydrochloride using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl- ⁇ -(3-pyridyl)alanine (166 mg, 17%).
  • the title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to L- ⁇ -(2-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester dihydrochloride using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl- ⁇ -(2-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester.
  • the title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using IN aqueous ⁇ aOH in dioxane/ water.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylsarcosine was prepared from phenylsarcosine using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to N-methyl-L- phenylalanine methyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-N-methylphenylalanine methyl ester.
  • the title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using LiOH in THF/water. Proton and carbon NMR analysis indicated a mixture of amide bond rotomers in about a 65:35 ratio.
  • N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-3-carbonyl) (1 eq) was dissolved in DMF, with Et 3 ⁇ (2.0 eq), BOP (1.1 eq), and L-phenylalanine benzyl ester HCl salt (1.1 eq).
  • the benzyl ester was isolated as an oil.
  • Example 18 (173) The procedure used for the preparation of Example 18 (173) was utilized. The title compound was isolated as an oil.
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was prepared from phenylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(O-benzyl)serine (754 mg, 2.07 mmol) was dissolved in 30 mL of dry DMF with phenylalanine ethyl ester hydrochloride salt (1.1 eq, 525 mg), Et 3 ⁇ (2.2 eq, 636 mL) and BOP reagent (1.1 eq, 1.00 g). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. EtOAc was added. The organic layer was washed with NaHC0 3 saturated, 10% citric acid, and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS0 4 .
  • Example 23 (191) (664 mg, 1.23 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) with a catalytic amount of Pearlman's catalyst. The hydrogenation reaction was run for 2 hours at 5 psi. The solution was filtered over celite. Upon evaporation of the solvent under reduced pressure, an oil was isolated as the title compound in quantitative yields. NMR data was as follows:
  • Boc-L-diphenylalanine was coupled to L-phenylalanine benzyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3.
  • the Boc group was removed using the procedure described in Example 11 (86).
  • NMR data was as follows:
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was esterified with thionyl chloride in methanol to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine methyl ester. This was then taken up in dry acetone (50 mL) with iodomethane
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine methyl ester was prepared from sarcosine methyl ester using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling in DMF ⁇ -(toluene-4- sulfonyl)sarcosine with (N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester in the presence of BOP and ⁇ MM, to give after aqueous workup and flash chromatography, the title compound.
  • N-Methyl-N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-serine (420 mg, 1.53 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (20 mL) at ice bath temperature.
  • L-(N- benzyl)histidine methyl ester hydrochloride salt (1.1 eq, 500 mg) was added as well as Et 3 ⁇ (2.2 eq, 471 mL), with HOBT (1.1 eq, 229 mg).
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2-thienylethylamine was prepared using the procedure described in Method 1. This compound was reacted with t-butyl bromoacetate yielding N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycine t- butyl ester (following the method of Zuckermann, Kerr, Kent, and Moos J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1992, 114, 10646-10647). The ester was hydrolyzed using the procedure described in Method 17. The title compound was prepared following the procedure described in Method 13. NMR data was as follows:
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to 4-cyanophenylalanine methyl ester hydrochloride (prepared via the method of Wagner, Voight, and Vieweg Pharmazie 1984, 39, 226-230) to give N-(toluene-4- sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-cyanophenylalanine methyl ester.
  • the compond was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using 0.5 ⁇ ⁇ aOH in THF/water. NMR data was as follows:
  • N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-tert-butylglycine was prepared from L-tert- butylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1.
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling in DMF ⁇ -(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L ⁇ tert-butylglycine with an L-phenylalanine ester in the presence of BOP and NMM. Conventional deesterification provided the title compound.
  • NMR data was as follows:
  • An in vitro assay was used to assess binding of candidate compounds to 4 ⁇ ! integrin.
  • Compounds which bind in this assay can be used to assess VCAM-1 levels in biological samples by conventional assays (e.g., competitive binding assays). This assay is sensitive to I o values as low as about InM.
  • ⁇ ⁇ j integrin The activity of ⁇ ⁇ j integrin was measured by the interaction of soluble VCAM-1 with Jurkat cells (e.g., American Type Culture Collection Nos. TIB 152, TIB 153, and CRL 8163), a human T-cell line which expresses high levels of ⁇ 4 ⁇ t integrin. VCAM-1 interacts with the cell surface in an ⁇ 4 ⁇ ⁇ integrin-dependent fashion (Yednock, et al. J. Biol. Chem., 1995,
  • VCAM-1 fusion protein containing the seven extracellular domains of VCAM-1 on the N- terminus and the human IgG ! heavy chain constant region on the C- terminus.
  • the VCAM-1 fusion protein was made and purified by the manner described by Yednock, supra.
  • Jurkat cells were grown in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, penicillin, streptomycin and glutamine as described by
  • each of the compounds in Examples 1-45 has an IC 50 of 15 ⁇ M or less.
  • EAE Experimental Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis
  • Log-growth Jurkat cells are washed and resuspended in normal animal plasma containing 20 ⁇ g/ml of the 15/7 antibody (described in the above example).
  • the Jurkat cells are diluted two-fold into either normal plasma samples containing known candidate compound amounts in various concentrations ranging from 66 ⁇ M to 0.01 ⁇ M, using a standard 12 point serial dilution for a standard curve, or into plasma samples obtained from the peripheral blood of candidate compound-treated animals.
  • PBS phosphate-buffered saline
  • the cells are then exposed to phycoerythrin-conjugated goat F(ab') 2 anti-mouse IgG Fc (Immunotech, Westbrook, ME), which has been adsorbed for any non-specific cross-reactivity by co-incubation with 5 % serum from the animal species being studied, at 1:200 and incubated in the dark at 4°C for 30 minutes.
  • phycoerythrin-conjugated goat F(ab') 2 anti-mouse IgG Fc immunotech, Westbrook, ME
  • This assay may also be used to determine the plasma levels needed to saturate the binding sites of other integrins, such as the ⁇ integrin, which is the integrin most closely related ⁇ 4 ⁇ (Palmer et al, 1993, J. Cell Bio., 123: 1289).
  • Such binding is predictive of in vivo utility for inflammatory conditions mediated by Og ⁇ j integrin, including by way of example, airway hyper-responsiveness and occlusion that occurs with chronic asthma, smooth muscle cell proliferation in atherosclerosis, vascular occlusion following angioplasty, fibrosis and glomerular scarring as a result of renal disease, aortic stenosis, hypertrophy of synovial membranes in rheumatoid arthritis, and inflammation and scarring that occur with the progression of ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease.
  • the above-described assay may be performed with a human colon carcinoma cell line, SW 480 (ATTC #CCL228) transfected with cDNA encoding ⁇ 9 integrin (Yokosaki et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem., 269:26691), in place of the Jurkat cells, to measure the binding of the integrin.
  • SW 480 cells which express other and subunits may be used.
  • another aspect of this invention is directed to a method for treating a disease in a mammalian patient, which disease is mediated by ⁇ 9 ⁇ 1? and which method comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of this invention.
  • a compound of this invention are preferably administered in a pharmaceutical composition described herein above. Effective daily dosing will depend upon the age, weight, condition of the patient which factors can be readily ascertained by the attending clinician. However, in a preferred embodiment, the compounds are admimstered from about 20 to 500 ⁇ g/kg per day. Using a conventional oral formulation, compounds of this invention would be active in this model.
  • EAE Experimental Autoimmune (or Allergic) Encephalomyelitis
  • Brains and spinal cords of adult Hartley guinea pigs are homogenized in an equal volume of phosphate-buffered saline.
  • An equal volume of Freund's complete adjuvant (100 mg mycobacterium tuberculosis plus 10 ml Freund's incomplete adjuvant) is added to the homogenate.
  • the mixture is emulsified by circulating it repeatedly through a 20 ml syringe with a peristaltic pump for about 20 minutes.
  • Antibody GG5/3 against 4 ⁇ j integrin (Keszthelyi et al., Neurology, 1996, 47:1053-1059), which delays the onset of symptoms, is used as a positive control and is injected subcutaneously at 3 mg/kg on Day 8 and 11.
  • Body weight and motor impairment are measured daily. Motor impairment is rated with the following clinical score:
  • a candidate compound is considered active if it delays the onset of symptoms, e.g., produces clinical scores no greater than 2 or slows body weight loss as compared to the control.
  • Inflammatory conditions mediated by 4 ⁇ i integrin include, for example, airway hyper-responsiveness and occlusion that occurs with chronic asthma.
  • the following describes an asthma model which can be used to study the in vivo effects of the compounds of this invention for use in treating asthma.
  • compounds of this invention are formulated into an aerosol and admimstered to sheep which are hypersensitive to Ascaris suum antigen.
  • AHR airway hyper-responsiveness
  • Allergic sheep which are shown to develop both early and late bronchial responses to inhaled Ascaris suum antigen are used to study the airway effects of the candidate compounds. Following topical anesthesia of the nasal passages with 2% lidocaine, a balloon catheter is advanced through one nostril into the lower esophagus. The animals are then intubated with a cuffed endotracheal tube through the other nostril with a flexible fiberoptic bronchoscope as a guide.
  • Pleural pressure is estimated according to Abraham (1994). Aerosols (see formulation below) are generated using a disposable medical nebulizer that provides an aerosol with a mass median aerodynamic diameter of 3.2 ⁇ m as determined with an Andersen cascade impactor.
  • the nebulizer is connected to a dosimeter system consisting of a solenoid valve and a source of compressed air (20 psi).
  • the output of the nebulizer is directed into a plastic T-piece, one end of which is connected to the inspiratory port of a piston respirator.
  • the solenoid valve is activated for 1 second at the beginning of the inspiratory cycle of the respirator. Aerosols are delivered at V ⁇ of 500 ml and a rate of 20 breaths/minute. A 0.5 % sodium bicarbonate solution only is used as a control.
  • Bronchial biopsies can be taken prior to and following the initiation of treatment and 24 hours after antigen challenge. Bronchial biopsies can be preformed according to Abraham (1994).
  • a solution of the candidate compound in 0.5% sodium bicarbonate/saline (w/v) at a concentration of 30.0 mg/mL is prepared using the following procedure:

Abstract

Disclosed are compounds which bind VLA-4. Certain of these compounds also inhibit leukocyte adhesion and, in particular, leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4. Such compounds are useful in the treatment of inflammatory diseases in a mammalian patient, e.g., human, such as asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes, inflammatory bowel disease, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis and myocardial ischemia. The compounds can also be administered for the treatment of inflammatory brain diseases such as multiple sclerosis.

Description

COMPOUNDS WHICH INHIBIT LEUKOCYTE ADHESION MEDIATED BY VLA-4
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benfit of U.S. Provisional Application No.
60/ , , which was converted pursuant to 37 C.F.R. §1.53(c)(2)(i) from U.S.
Patent Application No. 08/904,416, filed July 31, 1997, the disclosure of which is incoφorated by reference in its entirety .
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion and, in particular, leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4.
References
The following publications, patents and patent applications are cited in this application as superscript numbers:
1 Hemler and Takada, European Patent Application Publication No. 330,506, published August 30, 1989
2 Elices, et al., Cell, 60:577-584 (1990)
3 Springer, Nature, 346:425-434 (1990)
4 Osborn, Cell, 62:3-6 (1990)
5 Vedder, et al., Surgery, 106:509 (1989)
6 Pretolani, et al. , J. Exp. Med. , 180:795 (1994) Abraham, et al., J. Clin. Invest. , 93:776 (1994)
Mulligan, et al., J. Immunology, 150:2407 (1993)
Cybulsky, et al., Science, 251:788 (1991)
Li, et al., Arteήoscler. Thromb. , 13:197 (1993)
Sasseville, et al., Am. J. Path. , 144:27 (1994)
Yang, et al., Proc. Nat. Acad. Science (USA), 90: 10494 (1993)
Burkly, et al., Diabetes, 43:529 (1994)
Baron, et al. , J. Clin. Invest. , 93 : 1700 (1994)
Hamann, et al., J. Immunology, 152:3238 (1994)
Yednock, et al., Nature, 3.56:63 (1992)
Baron, et al., J. Exp. Med. , \T∑ 51 (1993) van Dinther-Janssen, et al., J. Immunology, \A1 \201 (1991)
van Dinther-Janssen, et al. , Annals. Rheumatic Dis. , 52:672 (1993)
Elices, et al. , J. Clin. Invest. , 93:405 (1994)
Postigo, et al., J. Clin. Invest. , 89:1445 (1991)
Paul, et al., Transpl. Proceed. , 25:813 (1993)
Okarhara, et al., Can. Res. , 54:3233 (1994)
Paavonen, et al., Int. J. Can. , 58:298 (1994)
Schadendorf, et al., J. Path. , 170:429 (1993)
Bao, et al., Diff. , 52:239 (1993)
Lauri, et al., British J. Cancer, 68:862 (1993)
Kawaguchi, et al., Japanese J. Cancer Res. , .83:1304 (1992) 29 Kogan, et al., U.S. Patent No. 5,510,332, issued April 23, 1996
30 International Patent Appl. Publication No. WO 96/01644
All of the above publications, patents and patent applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference in its entirety.
State of the Art
VLA-4 (also referred to as 4^1 integrin and CD49d/CD29), first identified by Hemler and Takada1 is a member of the βl integrin family of cell surface receptors, each of which comprises two subunits, an α chain and a β chain. VLA-4 contains an α4 chain and a βl chain. There are at least nine βl integrins, all sharing the same βl chain and each having a distinct chain. These nine receptors all bind a different complement of the various cell matrix molecules, such as fibronectin, laminin, and collagen. VLA-4, for example, binds to fibronectin. VLA-4 also binds non-matrix molecules that are expressed by endothelial and other cells. These non-matrix molecules include VCAM-1, which is expressed on cytokine-activated human umbilical vein endothelial cells in culture. Distinct epitopes of VLA-4 are responsible for the fibronectin and VCAM-1 binding activities and each activity has been shown to be inhibited independently.2
Intercellular adhesion mediated by VLA-4 and other cell surface receptors is associated with a number of inflammatory responses. At the site of an injury or other inflammatory stimulus, activated vascular endothelial cells express molecules that are adhesive for leukocytes. The mechanics of leukocyte adhesion to endothelial cells involves, in part, the recognition and binding of cell surface receptors on leukocytes to the corresponding cell surface molecules on endothelial cells. Once bound, the leukocytes migrate across the blood vessel wall to enter the injured site and release chemical mediators to combat infection. For reviews of adhesion receptors of the immune system, see, for example, Springer3 and Osborn4.
Inflammatory brain disorders, such as experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE), multiple sclerosis (MS) and meningitis, are examples of central nervous system disorders in which the endothelium leukocyte adhesion mechanism results in destruction to otherwise healthy brain tissue. Large numbers of leukocytes migrate across the blood brain barrier (BBB) in subjects with these inflammatory diseases. The leukocytes release toxic mediators that cause extensive tissue damage resulting in impaired nerve conduction and paralysis.
In other organ systems, tissue damage also occurs via an adhesion mechanism resulting in migration or activation of leukocytes. For example, it has been shown that the initial insult following myocardial ischemia to heart tissue can be further complicated by leukocyte entry to the injured tissue causing still further insult (Vedder et al.5). Other inflammatory conditions mediated by an adhesion mechanism include, by way of example, asthma6"8, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis9"10, AIDS dementia11, diabetes12"14 (including acute juvenile onset diabetis), inflammatory bowel disease15 (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis16"17, rheumatoid arthritis18"21, tissue transplantation22, tumor metastasis23"28, meningitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
In view of the above, assays for determining the VLA-4 level in a biological sample containing VLA-4 would be useful, for example, to diagnosis VLA-4 mediated conditions. Additionally, despite these advances in the understanding of leukocyte adhesion, the art has only recently addressed the use of inhibitors of adhesion in the treatment of inflammatory brain diseases and other inflammatory conditions29-30. The present invention addresses these and other needs. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides compounds which bind to VLA-4. Such compounds can be used, for example, to assay for the presence of VLA-4 in a sample and, in pharmaceutical compositions, to inhibit cellular adhesion mediated by VLA-4, for example, binding of VCAM-1 to VLA-4. The compounds of this invention have a binding affinity to VLA-4 as expressed by an I Q of about 15 μM or less (as measured using the procesure shown in Example 46 below) which compounds are defined by formula I below:
R3 O
I II
R1-S02-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-OH I
H R5
where
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, and substituted heteroaryl, and R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic and where R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 can form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or a unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group;
Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
Q is -C(X)NR7- wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; and X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
R5 is -CH2X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, carboxy 1-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy lheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy lheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, with the further provisos that:
A. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5' where R5' is -0-Z-NR8R8' or -O-Z-R12 wherein R8 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic, and R8 and R8 can be joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycles and substituted heterocycles, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -SQ-, Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
B. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5' where R5' is -NR12C(Z')NR8R8 or -NR12C(Z)R13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR12, R12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R8 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted aϊkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R8 and R8 is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic other than morpholino and thiomorpholino, or substituted heterocyclic or R8 and R8 can be joined to form a saturated heterocycle other than morpholino or thiomorpholino, a saturated substituted heterocycle or a saturated/unsaturated heterocycle having an amino group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl substituent, and further provided that when Z' is sulfur, at least one of R8 and R8' is a group other than aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, and R13 is selected from the group consisting of substituted heterocycles and saturated heterocycles other than morpholino and thiomorpholino, substituted heterocycles,
Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
C. R5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH2-) to the carbon atom to which it is attached; X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxy carbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxy carbonyl, heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic, substituted saturated heterocyclic, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenoxy, substituted alkynoxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocycloxy, substituted thioalkyl, substituted thioalkenyl, substituted thioalkynyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, guanidino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, halogen, cyano, nitro, -OS(0)2-alkyl, - OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -OS(O)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, - OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, - NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl, -S^ alkyl, - S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2-substituted aryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(alkyl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-N,N- (substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-(heterocyclic)amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(alkyl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (alkyl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, and N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino; D. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5 where R5 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of:
(a) substituted alkylcarbonylamino with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy lheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy lheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, - OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, - NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(b) alkoxyaryl substituted on the alkoxy moiety with a substituent selected from the group consisting of carboxyl and -COOR23 where R23 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic,
(c) aryl and heteroaryl; " (d) -NR'R' wherein each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy lheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy lheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, - OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -
NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, - NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substiruted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di- heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di- substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like), and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02- alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02- aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02- heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(e) -alkoxy-NR"R" wherein each R" is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when each R" is substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy lheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy lheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -
OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -
NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted arylamino), mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic; substituted heterocyclic, and substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like), and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; (f) substituted aryloxy and substituted heteroaryloxy with the proviso that at least one substituent on the substituted aryloxy /heteroaryloxy is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifhioromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(g) -alkoxy-saturated heterocyclic, -alkoxy-saturated substituted heterocyclic, -substituted alkoxy-heterocyclic and -substituted alkoxy-substituted saturated heterocyclic; (h) -O-heterocyclic and -O-substituted heterocyclic; (i) tetrazolyl; (j) -NR-S02-substituted alkyl where R is hydrogen, alkyl or aryl, with the proviso that at least one substituent on the alkyl moiety of the substituted alkylsulfonylamino is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(k) alkenylsulfonylamino, alkynylsulfonylamino, substituted alkenylsulfonylamino and substituted alkynylsulfonylamino;
(1) substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(m) amidine and amidine substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
(n) -C(0)NR' "R" ' where each R" ' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea, then the other R' " is alkyl, substituted alkyl (other than unsaturated heterocyclyl substituted-alkyl), cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic;
(o) -NR22C(0)-R18 where R18 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R22 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic;
(p) -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl or -S02-alkyl;
(q) -NR'C(0)NR19R19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic: (r) -NR'C(0)OR19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and R19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
(s) -aminocarbonyl-(N-formylheterocylcyl); and
(t) -alkyl-C(0)NH-heterocyclyl and -alkyl-C(0)NH-substituted heterocyclyl, and E. When R3 is other than H, R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5" where R5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy Iheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, - OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, - NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and still further with the following provisos excluding the following compounds
A. when R1 and R2 are joined together with the S02 and nitrogen atom to which they are attached respectively to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R3 is hydrogen, and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R5 is not benzyl; and
B. when R1 is ?-methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R3 is hydrogen, Q is -C(0)NCH3-, then R5 is not benzyl. In another embodiment, the compounds of this invention can also be provided as prodrugs which convert (e.g., hydrolyze, metabolize, etc.) in vivo to a compound of formula I above. In a preferred example of such an embodiment, the carboxylic acid in the compound of formula I is modified into a group which, in vivo, will convert to the carboxylic acid (including salts thereof). In a particularly preferred embodiment, such prodrugs are represented by compounds of formula IA:
R3 O
I II R1-S02-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-R6 IA
H R5
where
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl; R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or a unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group; Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4; R6 is selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran-3-yl (3,4- enol), amino, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, -O-(N- succinimidyl), -NH-adamantyl, -O-cholest-5-en-3-β-yl, -NHOY where Y is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, and substituted aryl, -NH(CH2)pCOOY where/? is an integer of from 1 to 8 and Y is as defined above, -Od^NR^10 where R9 is selected from the group consisting of -C(0)-aryl and -C(0)-substituted aryl and R10 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and -CH2COORπ where R11 is alkyl, and - NHS02Z" where Z" is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
Q is -C(X)NR7- wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; and X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur;
R5 is -CH2X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy Iheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the further provisos that:
A. R5 is not -(CH2).-Ar-R5 where R5' is selected from the group consisting of -0-Z-NR8R8' and -O-Z-R12 wherein R8 and R8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, and where R8 and R8' are joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycle and substituted heterocycle, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -S02-,
Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4; B. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5' where R5' is selected from the group consisting of -NR1 C(Z')NR8R8' and -NR12C(Z')R13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR12, R12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R8 and R8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R8 and R8' is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic other than morpholino and thiomorpholino, substituted heterocyclic or R8 and R8' can be joined to form a saturated heterocycle other than morpholino or thiomorpholino, a saturated substituted heterocycle or a saturated/unsaturated heterocycle having an amino group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl substituent, and further provided that when Z' is sulfur, at least one of R8 and R8' is a group other than aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, and R13 is selected from the group consisting of substituted heterocycles and saturated heterocycle other than morpholino and thiomorpholino,
Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
C. R5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH2-) to the carbon atom to which it is attached; X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxycarbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxy carbonyl, heterocyclyloxycarbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic, substituted saturated heterocyclic, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenoxy, substituted alkynoxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocycloxy, substituted thioalkyl, substituted thioalkenyl, substituted thioalkynyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, guanidino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, halogen, cyano, nitro, -OS(0)2-alkyl, - OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-cycloalkyl,
-NRS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl, -S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2- substituted aryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2- heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(alkyl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-
(substituted aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-N,N-(substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- (heterocyclic)amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(alkyl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(alkyl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, and N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino; and
D. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5" where R5 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of:
(a) substituted alkylcarbonylamino with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, - OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, - NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(b) alkoxyaryl substituted on the alkoxy moiety with a substituent selected from the group consisting of carboxyl and -COOR23 where R23 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic,
(c) aryl and heteroaryl;
(d) -NR'R' wherein each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, - OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(O)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, - NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, - NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di- heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di- substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02- alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02- aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02- heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; (e) -alkoxy-NR"R" wherein each R" is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when each R" is substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, - OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, - NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(f) substituted aryloxy and substituted heteroaryloxy with the proviso that at least one substituent on the substituted aryloxy /heteroaryloxy is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1 ,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(g) -alkoxy-saturated heterocyclic, -alkoxy-saturated substituted heterocyclic, -substituted alkoxy-heterocyclic and -substituted alkoxy-substituted saturated heterocyclic; (h) -O-heterocyclic and -O-substituted heterocyclic; (i) tetrazolyl;
(j) -NR-S02-substituted alkyl where R is hydrogen, alkyl or aryl, with the proviso that at least one substituent on the alkyl moiety of the substituted alkylsulfonylamino is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea; (k) alkenylsulfonylamino, alkynylsulfonylamino, substituted alkenylsulfonylamino and substituted alkynylsulfonylamino;
(1) substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclic, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(m) amidine and amidine substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
(n) -C(0)NR' "R" ' where each R' " is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxyethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea, then the other R' " is alkyl, substituted alkyl (other than unsaturated heterocyclyl substituted-alkyl), cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic; (o) -NR22C(0)-R18 where R18 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R22 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic; (p) -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl or -S02-alkyl;
(q) -NR'C(0)NR19R19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic:
(r) -NR'C(0)OR19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and R19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
(s) -aminocarbonyl-(N-formylheterocylcyl); and - (t) -alkyl-C(0)NH-heterocyclyl and -alkyl-C(0)NH-substituted heterocyclyl, E. When R3 is other than H, R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5" where R5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl- substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -
OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, - NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -
NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02- substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof with the following provisos
A. when R1 is ø-carboxymethylphenyl, R2 is hydrogen, R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl;
B. when R1 and R2 are joined to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl;
C. when R1 is /?-methylphenyl, R2 is hydrogen, R5 is benzyl or /j-hydroxybenzyl, R3 is -(CH2)sC(0)0-t-butyl where s is 1 or 2, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-t-butyl;
D. when R1 is /?-methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R5 is benzyl, R3 is -CH(φ)2, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl;
E. when R1 is /?-methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R5 is methyl, R3 is -hydroxymethyl, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-methyl; and
F. when R1 is /?-methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R3 is methyl or t-butyl, R5 is p- hydroxybenzyl, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-t-butyl.
Preferably, in the compounds of formula I and I A above, R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl. Even more preferably R1 is selected from the group consisting of 4-methylphenyl, methyl, benzyl, n-butyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, phenyl, 2,4,6- trimethylphenyl, 2-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl, 2-carboxyphenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 4- trifluoromethylphenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 4-(CH3C(0)NH- )phenyl, 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, isopropyl, 3,5-di- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4-t-butoxyphenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 2-thienyl, 1- N-methyl-3-methyl-5-chloropyrazol-4-yl, phenethyl, l-N-methylimidazol-4-yl, 4- bromophenyl, 4-amidinophenyl, 4-methylamidinophenyl, 4-[CH3SC(=NH)]phenyl, 5- chloro-2-thienyl, 2,5-dichloro-4-thienyl, l-N-methyl-4-pyrazolyl, 2-thiazolyl, 5-methyl- l,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl, 4-[H2NC(S)]phenyl, 4-aminophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2- fluorophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, pyridin-3-yl, pyrimidin-2-yl, 4-(3'- dimethylamino-n-propoxy)-phenyl, and l-methylpyrazol-4-yl.
Preferably, in the compounds of formula I and IA above, R2 is hydrogen, methyl, phenyl, benzyl, -(CH2)2-2-thienyl, and -(CH2)2-φ.
In one embodiment, R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 are joined to form a heterocyclic group or substituted heterocyclic group. Preferred heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic groups include those having from 5 to 7 ring atoms having 2 to 3 heteroatoms in the ring selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur which ring is optionally fused to another ring such as a phenyl or cyclohexyl ring to provide for a fused ring heterocycle of from 10 to 14 ring atoms having 2 to 4 heteroatoms in the ring selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Specifically preferred RVR2 joined groups include, by way of example, benzisothiazolonyl (saccharin-2-yl).
Preferably, in the compounds of formula I and I A above, R3 includes all of the isomers arising by substitution with methyl, phenyl, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, -CH2CH2- COOH, -CH2-COOH, 2-amidoethyl, /.rø-butyl, t-butyl, -CH20-benzyl and hydroxymethyl.
Q is preferably -C(0)NH- or -C(S)NH-.
R5 is preferably selected from the group consisting of all possible isomers arising by substitution with the following groups: benzyl, (N-benzylimidazol-4- yl)methyl, (pyridin-2-yl)methyl, (pyridin-3-yl)methyl, (pyridin-4-yl)methyl, 4-[2- (pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-iodobenzyl, 4- cyanobenzyl, 4-(2-bromobenzamido)benzyl, 4-(pyridin-4-yl-C(0)NH-)benzyl, and 4- hydroxybenzyl.
In the compounds of formula IA, R6 is preferably 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran-3-yl
(3,4-enol), methoxy, ethoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, t-butoxy, cyclopentoxy, neo- pentoxy, 2-α- .rø-propyl-4-β-rnethylcyclohexoxy, 2-β-isopropyl-4-β- methylcyclohexoxy, -NH2, benzyloxy, -NHCH2COOH, -NHCH2CH2COOH, -NH- adamantyl, -NHCH2CH2COOCH2CH3, -NHS02-/?-CH3-φ, -NHOR8 where R8 is hydrogen, methyl, Mø-propyl or benzyl, O-(N-succinimidyl), -0-cholest-5-en-3-β-yl, - OCH2-OC(0)C(CH3)3, -0(CH2)zNHC(0)W where z is 1 or 2 and W is selected from the group consisting of pyrid-3-yl, N-methylpyridyl, and N-methyl-l,4-dihydro-pyrid-3-yl, -NR"C(0)-R' where R' is aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic and R" is hydrogen or -CH2C(0)OCH2CH3.
Preferred compounds within the scope of formula I and IA above include by way of example:
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carbonyl-L- phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbony lbenzenesulf ony l)glycy 1-L-pheny lalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-phenylalanyl-D,L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(3-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(4-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-β-(2-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D ,L-phenylsarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-3-carbonyl)-L- phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-((9-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D ,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D ,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D , L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]-D,L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]-D,L-phenylala- nine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-(iodo)phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-cyanophenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-tert-butylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-D,L-alaninyl-L-4-(isonicotinamido)phenylalanine methyl ester
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof as well as any of the ester compounds recited above wherein one ester is replaced with another ester selected from the group consisting of methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, isobutyl ester, sec-butyl ester and tert-butyl ester.
This invention also provides methods for binding VLA-4 in a biological sample which method comprises contacting the biological sample with a compound of formula I or I A above under conditions wherein said compound binds to VLA-4. Certain of the compounds of formula I and IA above are also useful in reducing VLA-4 mediated inflammation in vivo.
This invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of one or more of the compounds of formula I or IA above with the exception that F? and R5 are derived from L-amino acids or other similarly configured starting materials. Alternatively, racemic mixtures can be used.
The pharmaceutical compositions may be used to treat VLA-4 mediated disease conditions. Such disease conditions include, by way of example, asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetis), inflammatory bowel disease (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis, memngitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
Accordingly, this invention also provides methods for the treatment of an inflammatory disease in a patient mediated by VLA-4 which methods comprise administering to the patient the pharmaceutical compositions described above.
Preferred compounds of formula I and IA above include those set forth in Table I below: Table I
R3 O
R1-SO2-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-R6
H R5
I I
Figure imgf000035_0001
I
I
Figure imgf000036_0001
I
I
Figure imgf000037_0001
I
1
Figure imgf000038_0001
Figure imgf000039_0001
I
OJ
1
Figure imgf000039_0002
Figure imgf000040_0001
I J
VO
I
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
DET AILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As above, this invention relates to compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion and, in particular, leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4. However, prior to describing this invention in further detail, the following terms will first be defined.
Definitions
As used herein, "alkyl" refers to alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, t-butyl, n-heptyl, octyl and the like.
"Substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxylaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heteroaryl, substituted aryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2- heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2- alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-
(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with - S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, - S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Alkoxy" refers to the group "alky 1-0- " which includes, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, z'sø-propoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like. " Substituted alkoxy" refers to the group "substituted alkyl-O-" .
"Acyl" refers to the groups H-C(O)-, alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl- C(O)-, alkenyl-C(O)-, substituted alkenyl-C(O)-, alkynyl-C(O)-, substituted alkynyl-C(O)- cycloalkyl-C(O)-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, substituted aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)-, substituted heteroaryl-C(O), heterocyclic-C(O)-, and substituted heterocyclic-C(O)- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Acylamino" refers to the group -C(0)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where each R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Thiocarbonylamino" refers to the group -C(S)NRR where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where each R is joined to form, together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Acyloxy" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)0-, substituted alkyl-
C(0)0-, alkenyl-C(0)0-, substituted alkenyl-C(0)0-, alkynyl-C(0)0-, substituted alkynyl-C(0)0-, aryl-C(0)0-, substituted aryl-C(0)0-, cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, substituted cycloalkyl-C(0)0-, heteroaryl-C(0)0-, substituted heteroaryl-C(0)0-, heterocyclic-C(0)0-, and substituted heterocyclic-C(0)0- wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Alkenyl" refers to alkenyl group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation.
"Substituted alkenyl" refers to alkenyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, - NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- (substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkenyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkenyl/ substituted alkenyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02- substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02- heterocyclic, -S0 -substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl. " Alkynyl" refers to alkynyl group preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 3 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation.
"Substituted alkynyl" refers to alkynyl groups having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -
NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl , -NRS (0)2-heterocyclic ,
-NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkynyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkynyl/ substituted alkynyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02- substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, - S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02- heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Amidino" refers to the group H2NC(=NH)- and the term "alkylamidino" refers to compounds having 1 to 3 alkyl groups (e.g., alkylHNC(=NH)-).
"Thioamidino" refers to the group RSC(=NH)- where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"jAminoacyl" refers to the groups -NRC(0)alkyl,
-NRC(0)substituted alkyl, -NRC(0)cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)alkenyl, -NRC(0)substituted alkenyl, -NRC(0)alkynyl, -NRC(0)substituted alkynyl, -NRC(0)aryl, -NRC(0)substituted aryl, -NRC(0)heteroaryl, -NRC(0)substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(0)heterocyclic, and -NRC(0)substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aminocarbonyloxy" refers to the groups -NRC(0)0-alkyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkyl, -NRC(0)0-alkenyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(0)0-alkynyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted alkynyl, -NRC(0)0- cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)0-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)0-aryl, -NRC(0)0- substituted aryl, -NRC(0)0-heteroaryl, -NRC(0)0-substituted heteroaryl,
-NRC(0)0-heterocyclic, and -NRC(0)0-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Oxycarbonylamino" refers to the groups -OC(0)NH2, -OC(0)NRR, -OC(0)NR-alkyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted alkyl, -OC(0)NR- alkenyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted alkenyl, -OC(0)NR-alkynyl, -OC(0)NR- substituted alkynyl, -OC(0)NR-cycloalkyl, -OC(0)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -OC(0)NR-aryl, -OC(0)NR-substituted aryl, -OC(0)NR- heteroaryl, -OC(0)NR-substituted heteroaryl,- OC(0)NR-heterocyclic, and -OC(0)NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl or where each R is joined to form, together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Oxythiocarbonylamino" refers to the groups -OC(S)NH2, -OC(S)NRR, -OC(S)NR-alkyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted alkyl, -OC(S)NR- alkenyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted alkenyl, -OC(S)NR-alkynyl, -OC(S)NR- substituted alkynyl, -OC(S)NR-cycloalkyl, -OC(S)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -OC(S)NR-aryl, -OC(S)NR-substituted aryl, -OC(S)NR- heteroaryl, -OC(S)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -OC(S)NR-heterocyclic, and
-OC(S)NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl or where each R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aminocarbonylamino" refers to the groups -NRC(0)NRR, -NRC(0)NR-alkyl, -NRC(0)NR-substituted alkyl, -NRC(0)NR-alkenyl, -NRC(0)NR-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(0)NR-alkynyl,
-NRC(0)NR-substituted alkynyl, -NRC(0)NR-aryl, -NRC(0)NR- substituted aryl, -NRC(0)NR-cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(0)NR-heteroaryl, and -NRC(0)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(0)NR-heterocyclic, and -NRC(0)NR-substituted heterocyclic where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl or where each
R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring as well as where one of the amino groups is blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Ammothiocarbonylamino" refers to the groups -NRC(S)NRR, -NRC(S)NR-alkyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted alkyl, -NRC(S)NR-alkenyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(S)NR-alkynyl, -NRC(S)NR- substituted alkynyl, -NRC(S)NR-aryl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted aryl, -NRC(S)NR-cycloalkyl, -NRC(S)NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(S)NR- heteroaryl, and -NRC(S)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(S)NR- heterocyclic, and -NRC(S)NR-substituted heterocyclic where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl or where each R is joined to form together with the nitrogen atom a heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic ring as well as where one of the amino groups is blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aryl" or "Ar" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthryl) which condensed rings may or may not be aromatic (e.g., 2-benzoxazolinone, 2H-l,4-benzoxazin-3(4H)- one-7yl, and the like). Preferred aryls include phenyl and naphthyl.
Substituted aryl refers to aryl groups which are substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl- substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, carboxy lamido, cyano, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -
S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-alkenyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkenyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2- substituted aryl, -S(0)2-heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2- heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl,
-NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di- (substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, amino groups on the substituted aryl blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- which includes, by way of example, phenoxy, naphthoxy, and the like.
"Substituted aryloxy" refers to substituted aryl-O- groups.
"Aryloxyaryl" refers to the group -aryl-O-aryl.
"Substituted aryloxyaryl" refers to aryloxyaryl groups substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents on either or both aryl rings selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl- substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, carboxy lamido, cyano, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-alkenyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkenyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2- substituted aryl, -S(0)2-heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2- heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and amino groups on the substituted aryl blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) or -SOjNRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring including, by way of example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl and the like. Excluded from this definition are multi-ring alkyl groups such as adamantanyl, etc. " Cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms having single or multiple unsaturation but which are not aromatic.
"Substituted cycloalkyl" and "substituted cycloalkenyl" refer to a cycloalkyl and cycloalkenyl groups, preferably of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of oxo (=0), thioxo (=S), alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkynyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkynyl/ substituted alkynyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02- substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, - S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S0 - heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Cycloalkoxy" refers to -O-cycloalkyl groups.
"Substituted cycloalkoxy" refers to -O-substituted cycloalkyl groups.
"Guanidino" refers to the groups -NRC(=NR)NRR, -NRC(=NR)NR-alkyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted alkyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-alkenyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted alkenyl,
-NRC(=NR)NR-alkynyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted alkynyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-aryl, -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted aryl, -NRC(=NR)NR- cycloalkyl, -NRC(=NR)NR-heteroaryl, -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(=NR)NR-heterocyclic, and -NRC(=NR)NR-substituted heterocyclic where each R is independently hydrogen and alkyl as well as where one of the amino groups is blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Guanidinosulfone" refers to the groups -NRC(=NR)NRS02-alkyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted alkyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-alkenyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted alkenyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-alkynyl, -NRC( = NR)NRS02-substituted alkynyl, -NRC( = NR)NRS02-aryl,
-NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted aryl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-cycloalkyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02- heteroaryl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted heteroaryl, -NRC(=NR)NRS02-heterocyclic, and -NRC(=NR)NRS02-substituted heterocyclic where each R is independently hydrogen and alkyl and wherein alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either chloro or bromo.
"Heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic carbocyclic group of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within the ring. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl or furyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl and furyl. " Substituted heteroaryl" refers to heteroaryl groups which are substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, amino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl-cycloalkyl, carboxyl- substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, carboxy lamido, cyano, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -
S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -S(0)2-alkenyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkenyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2- substituted aryl, -S(0)2-heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2- heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(O)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, amino groups on the substituted aryl blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like), and -SO2NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
"Heteroaryloxy" refers to the group -O-heteroaryl and "substituted heteroaryloxy" refers to the group -O-substituted heteroaryl.
"Heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" refers to a saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from the group consisting of nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring wherein, in fused ring systems, one or more the rings can be aryl or heteroaryl.
"Saturated heterocyclic" refers to heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings lacking unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
"Unsaturated heterocyclic" refers to non-aromatic heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings having unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
"Substituted heterocyclic" refers to heterocycle groups which are substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of oxo (=0), thioxo (=S), alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, amino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, substituted aryl, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, aryloxyaryl, substituted aryloxyaryl, halogen, hydroxyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxy laryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, heteroaryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substiruted heterocyclic, mono- and alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkynyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkynyl/substituted alkynyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02- substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, - S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02- heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl.
Examples of heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azetidine, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, dihydroindole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide, 1,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline , 4,5,6, 7-tetrahydrobenzo [b] thiophene , thiazole , thiazolidine, thiophene, benzo[b]thiophene, morpholino, thiomorpholino, piperidinyl, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
"Saturated substituted heterocyclic" refers to substituted heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings lacking unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
"Unsaturated substituted heterocyclic" refers to non-aromatic substituted heterocycles of single or multiple condensed rings having unsaturation in any ring (e.g., carbon to carbon unsaturation, carbon to nitrogen unsaturation, nitrogen to nitrogen unsaturation, and the like).
"Heterocyclyloxy" refers to the group -O-heterocyclic and "substituted heterocyclyloxy" refers to the group -O-substituted heterocyclic.
"Thiol" refers to the group -SH.
"Thioalkyl" refers to the groups -S-alkyl.
"Substituted thioalkyl" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
"Thiocycloalkyl" refers to the groups -S-cycloalkyl.
"Substituted thiocycloalkyl" refers to the group -S-substituted cycloalkyl.
"Thioaryl" refers to the group -S-aryl and "substituted thioaryl" refers to the group -S-substituted aryl.
"Thioheteroaryl" refers to the group -S-heteroaryl and "substituted thioheteroaryl" refers to the group -S-substituted heteroaryl. " Thioheterocyclic" refers to the group -S-heterocyclic and "substituted thioheterocyclic" refers to the group -S-substituted heterocyclic.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formula I or IA which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
Compound Preparation The compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. Suitable protecting groups for various functional groups as well as suitable conditions for protecting and deprotecting particular functional groups are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups are described in T. W. Greene and G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
Furthermore, the compounds of this invention will typically contain one or more chiral centers. Accordingly, if desired, such compounds can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e., as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures. All such stereoisomers (and enriched mixtures) are included within the scope of this invention, unless otherwise indicated. Pure stereoisomers (or enriched mixtures) may be prepared using, for example, optically active starting materials or stereoselective reagents well-known in the art. Alternatively, racemic mixtures of such compounds can be separated using, for example, chiral column chromatography, chiral resolving agents and the like.
In a preferred method of synthesis, the compounds of formula I and
IA wherein Q is -C(0)NR7- are prepared by first coupling an amino acid of formula II:
R3
R2-NH-C-COOH II
H
wherein R2 and R3 are as defined above, with a sulfonyl chloride of formula
III:
R^SO^-Cl III wherein R1 is as defined above, to provide an N-sulfonyl amino acid of formula IV:
R3
R1-S02-Ν(R2)-C-COOH IV
H
wherein R -R3 are as defined above.
This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino acid of formula II with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 2 equivalents, of sulfonyl chloride III in an inert diluent such as dichloromethane and the like. Generally, the reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about -70 °C to about 40 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours. Preferably, this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like. Alternatively, the reaction can be conducted under Schotten-Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like, as the base. Upon completion of the reaction, the resulting N-sulfonyl amino acid IV is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
The amino acids of formula II employed in the above reaction are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures. Examples of suitable amino acids for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, glycine, 2-tert-butylglycine, D,L-phenylglycine, L-alanine, α-methylalanine, N- methyl-L-phenylalanine, L-diphenylalanine, sarcosine, D,L- phenylsarcosine, L-aspartic acid β-tert-butyl ester, L-glutamic acid γ-tert- butyl ester, L-(0-beπzyl)serine, 1-aminocyclopropanecarboxylic acid, 1- aminocyclobutanecarboxylic acid, 1-aminocyclopentanecarboxylic acid
(cycloleucine) 1-aminocyclohexanecarboxylic acid, L-serine and the like. If desired, the corresponding carboxylic acid esters of the amino acids of formula II, such as the methyl esters, ethyl esters and the like, can be employed in the above reaction with the sulfonyl chloride III. Subsequent hydrolysis of the ester group to the carboxylic acid using conventional reagents and conditions, i.e., treatment with an alkali metal hydroxide in an inert diluent such as methanol/ water, then provides the N-sulfonyl amino acid IV.
Similarly, the sulfonyl chlorides of formula III employed in the above reaction are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures. Such compounds are typically prepared from the corresponding sulfonic acid, i.e., from compounds of the formula R1-S03H where R1 is as defined above, using phosphorous trichloride and phosphorous pentachloride. This reaction is generally conducted by contacting the sulfonic acid with about 2 to 5 molar equivalents of phosphorous trichloride and phosphorous pentachloride, either neat or in an inert solvent, such as dichloromethane, at temperature in the range of about 0°C to about 80 °C for about 1 to about 48 hours to afford the sulfonyl chloride. Alternatively, the sulfonyl chlorides of formula III can be prepared from the corresponding thiol compound, i.e., from compounds of the formula R'-SH where R1 is as defined above, by treating the thiol with chlorine (Cy and water under conventional reaction conditions. Examples of sulfonyl chlorides suitable for use in this invention include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, 2-propanesulfonyl chloride, 1-butanesulfonyl chloride, benzenesulf onyl chloride, 1- naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, 2-naphthalenesulfonyl chloride, p- toluenesulfonyl chloride, α-toluenesulfonyl chloride, 4- acetamidobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-amidinobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4- tert-butylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-bromobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 2- carboxybenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-cyanobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 3,4- dichlorobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 3,5-dichlorobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 3,4-dimethoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride, 3,5- ditrifluoromethylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-fluorobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-methoxybenzenesulfonyl chloride, 2- methoxy carbonylbenzenesulfonyl chloride , 4-methylamidobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-nitrobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-thioamidobenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4-trifluoromethylbenzenesulfonyl chloride, 4- trifluoromethoxybenzenesulf ony 1 chloride , 2,4, 6-trimethy lbenzenesulf ony 1 chloride, 2-phenylethanesulfonyl chloride, 2-thiophenesulfonyl chloride, 5- chloro-2-thiophenesulf ony 1 chloride , 2,5 -dichloro-4-thiophenesulfony 1 chloride, 2-thiazolesulfonyl chloride, 2-methyl-4-thiazolesulfonyl chloride, l-methyl-4-imidazolesulfonyl chloride, l-methyl-4-pyrazolesulfonyl chloride, 5-chloro-l,3-dimethyl-4-pyrazolesulfonyl chloride, 3- pyridinesulfonyl chloride, 2-pyrimidinesulfonyl chloride, and the like. If desired, a sulfonyl fluoride, sulfonyl bromide or sulfonic acid anhydride may be used in place of the sulfonyl chloride in the above reaction to form the N-sulfonyl amino acids of formula IV.
The intermediate N-sulfonyl amino acids of formula IV, wherein R3 is hydrogen, can also be prepared by reacting a sulfonamide of formula V:
R^SO.-ΝH-R2 V wherein R1 and R2 are as defined above, with a carboxylic acid derivative of the formula L(R3)CHCOOR where L is a leaving group, such as chloro, bromo, iodo, mesylate, tosylate and the like, R3 is as defined above and R is hydrogen or an alkyl group. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the sulfonamide V with at least one equivalent, preferably 1.1 to
2 equivalents, of the carboxylic acid derivative in the presence of a suitable base, such as triethylamine, in an inert diluent, such as DMF, at a temperature ranging from about 24 °C to about 37 °C for about 0.5 to about 4 hours. This reaction is further described in Zuckermann et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc , 1992, 114, 10646-10647. Preferred carboxylic acid derivatives for use in this reaction are α-chloro and α-bromocarboxylic acid esters such as tert-butyl bromoacetate, and the like. When an carboxylic acid ester is employed in this reaction, the ester group is subsequently hydrolyzed using conventional procedures to afford an N-sulfonyl amino acid of formula IV .
The compounds of formula I are then prepared by coupling the intermediate N-sulfonyl amino acid of formula IV with an amino acid derivative of formula VI:
O
R7-ΝH-CH-C-R6 VI R5
wherein R5-R7 are as defined above. This coupling reaction is typically conducted using well-known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides, BOP reagent (benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphonate) and the like. Suitable carbodiimides include, by way of example, dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (DCC), l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide (EDC) and the like. If desired, polymer supported forms of carbodiimide coupling reagents may also be used including, for example, those described in Tetrahedron Letters, 34(48), 7685 (1993). Additionally, well-known coupling promoters, such as N-hy droxy succinimide, 1-hy droxy benzotriazole and the like, may be used to facilitate the coupling reaction.
This coupling reaction is typically conducted by contacting the N- sulfonylamino acid IV with about 1 to about 2 equivalents of the coupling reagent and at least one equivalent, preferably about 1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of amino acid derivative VI in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N- dimethy If ormamide and the like. Generally, this reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about, 37 °C for about 12 to about 24 hours. Upon completion of the reaction, the compound of formula I is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
Alternatively, the N-sulfonyl amino acid IV can be converted into an acid halide and the acid halide coupled with amino acid derivative VI to provide compounds of formula I. The acid halide of VI can be prepared by contacting VI with an inorganic acid halide, such as thionyl chloride, phosphorous trichloride, phosphorous tribromide or phosphorous pentachloride, or preferably, with oxalyl chloride under conventional conditions. Generally, this reaction is conducted using about 1 to 5 molar equivalents of the inorganic acid halide or oxalyl chloride, either neat or in an inert solvent, such as dichloromethane or carbon tetrachloride, at temperature in the range of about 0°C to about 80°C for about 1 to about 48 hours. A catalyst, such as N,N-dimethy If ormamide, may also be used in this reaction. The acid halide of N-sulfonyl amino acid IV is then contacted with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents, of amino acid derivative VI in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -70 °C to about 40 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours. Preferably, this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like. Alternatively, the reaction can be conducted under Schotten-Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like. Upon completion of the reaction, the compound of formula I is recovered by conventional methods including neutralization, extraction, precipitation, chromatography, filtration, and the like.
Alternatively, the compounds of formula I can be prepared by first forming a diamino acid derivative of formula VII:
R3 R7 O
R2-ΝH-C-C(0)Ν-CH-C-R6 VII
H R5
wherein R2,R3,R57 are as defined above. The diamino acid derivatives of formula VII can be readily prepared by coupling an amino acid of formula
II with an amino acid derivative of formula VI using conventional amino acid coupling techniques and reagents, such carbodiimides, BOP reagent and the like, as described above. Diamino acid VII can then be sulfonated using a sulfonyl chloride of formula III and using the synthetic procedures described above to provide a compound of formula I. The amino acid derivatives of formula VI employed in the above reactions are either known compounds or compounds that can be prepared from known compounds by conventional synthetic procedures. For example, amino acid derivatives of formula VI can be prepared by C- alkylating commercially available diethyl 2-acetamidomalonate (Aldrich,
Milwaukee, Wisconsin, USA) with an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide. This reaction is typically conducted by treating the diethyl 2- acetamidomalonate with at least one equivalent of sodium ethoxide and at least one equivalent of an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide in refluxing ethanol for about 6 to about 12 hours. The resulting C-alkylated malonate is then deacetylated, hydrolyzed and decarboxylated by heating in aqueous hydrochloric acid at reflux for about 6 to about 12 hours to provide the amino acid, typically as the hydrochloride salt.
Examples of amino acid derivatives of formula VI suitable for use in the above reactions include, but are not limited to, L-alanine methyl ester, L-isoleucine methyl ester, L-leucine methyl ester, L-valine methyl ester, β-tert-butyl-L-aspartic acid methyl ester, L-asparagine tert-butyl ester, e-Boc-L-lysine methyl ester, e-Cbz-L-lysine methyl ester, y-tert- butyl-L-glutamic acid methyl ester, L-glutamine tert-butyl ester, L-(N- methyl)histidine methyl ester, L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester, L- methionine methyl ester, L-(O-benzyl)serine methyl ester, L-tryptophan methyl ester, L-phenylalanine methyl ester, L-phenylalanine isopropyl ester, L-phenylalanine benzyl ester, L-phenylalaninamide, N-methyl-L- phenylalanine benzyl ester, 3 -carboxy-D, L-phenylalanine methyl ester, 4- carboxy-D, L-phenylalanine methyl ester, L-4-chlorophenylalanine methyl ester, L-4-(3-dimethylaminopropyloxy)phenylalanine methyl ester, L-4- iodophenylalanine methyl ester, L-3,4-methylenedioxyphenylalanine methyl ester, L-3,4-ethylenedioxyphenylalanine methyl ester, L-4- nitrophenylalanine methyl ester, L-tyrosine methyl ester, D,L- homophenylalanine methyl ester, L-(0-methyl)tyrosine methyl ester, L-(<9- tert-butyl)tyrosine methyl ester, L-(O-benzyl)tyrosine methyl ester, L-3,5- diiodotyrosine methyl ester, L-3-iodotyrosine methyl ester, β-(l-naphthyl)- L-alanine methyl ester, β-(2-naphthyl)-L-alanine methyl ester, β-(2- thienyl)-L-alanine methyl ester, β-cyclohexyl-L-alanine methyl ester, β-(2- pyridyl)-L-alanine methyl ester, β-(3-pyridyl)-L-alanine methyl ester, β-(4- pyridyl)-L-alanine methyl ester, β-(2-thiazolyl)-D,L-alanine methyl ester, β-(l,2,4-triazol-3-yl)-D,L-alanine methyl ester, and the like. If desired, of course, other esters or amides of the above-described compounds may also be employed.
For ease of synthesis, the compounds of formula I are typically prepared as an ester, i.e., where R6 is an alkoxy or substituted alkoxy group and the like. If desired, the ester group can be hydrolysed using conventional conditions and reagents to provide the corresponding carboxylic acid. Typically, this reaction is conducted by treating the ester with at least one equivalent of an alkali metal hydroxide, such as lithium, sodium or potassium hydroxide, in an inert diluent, such as methanol or mixtures of methanol and water, at a temperature ranging about 0°C to about 24°C for about 1 to about 12 hours. Alternatively, benzyl esters may be removed by hydrogenolysis using a palladium catalyst, such as palladium on carbon. The resulting carboxylic acids may be coupled, if desired, to amines such as β-alanine ethyl ester, hydroxyamines such as hydroxylamine and N-hy droxy succinimide, alkoxyamines and substituted alkoxyamines such as O-methylhydroxylamine and O- benzylhydroxylamine, and the like, using conventional coupling reagents and conditions as described above.
As will be apparent to those skilled in the art, other functional groups present on any of the substituents of the compounds of formula I can be readily modified or derivatized either before or after the above- described coupling reactions using well-known synthetic procedures. For example, a nitro group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof may be readily reduced by hydrogenation in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as palladium on carbon, to provide the corresponding amino group. This reaction is typically conducted at a temperature of from about 20°C to about 50°C for about 6 to about 24 hours in an inert diluent, such as methanol. Compounds having a nitro group on the R5 substituent can be prepared, for example, by using a 4- nitrophenylalanine derivative and the like in the above-described coupling reactions.
Similarly, a pyridyl group can be hydrogenated in the presence of a platinum catalyst, such as platinum oxide, in an acidic diluent to provide the corresponding piperidinyl analogue. Generally, this reaction is conducted by treating the pyridine compound with hydrogen at a pressure ranging from about 20 psi to about 60 psi, preferably about 40 psi, in the presence of the catalyst at a temperature of about 20 °C to about 50 °C for about 2 to about 24 hours in an acidic diluent, such as a mixture of methanol and aqueous hydrochloric acid. Compounds having a pyridyl group can be readily prepared by using, for example, β-(2-pyridyl)-, β-(3- pyridyl)- or β-(4-pyridyl)-L-alanine derivatives in the above-described coupling reactions.
Additionally, when the R5 substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof contains a primary or secondary amino group, such amino groups can be further derivatized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide, by way of example, amides, sulfonamides, ureas, thioureas, carbamates, secondary or tertiary amines and the like. Compounds having a primary amino group on the R5 substituent may be prepared, for example, by reduction of the corresponding nitro compound as described above. Alternatively, such compounds can be prepared by using an amino acid derivative of formula VI derived from lysine, 4- aminophenylalanine and the like in the above-described coupling reactions.
By way of illustration, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing a primary or secondary amino group, such as where R5 is a (4-aminophenyl)methyl group, can be readily N-acylated using conventional acylating reagents and conditions to provide the corresponding amide. This acylation reaction is typically conducted by treating the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of a carboxylic acid in the presence of a coupling reagent such as a carbodiimide, BOP reagent (benzotriazol-1- yloxy-tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphonate) and the like, in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, N,N-dimethylformamide and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 37 °C for about 4 to about 24 hours. Preferably, a promoter, such as N-hy droxy succinimide, 1-hydroxy- benzotriazole and the like, is used to facilitate the acylation reaction. Examples of carboxylic acids suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, N-tert-buty loxycarbonylglycine, N-tert- buty loxy carbonyl-L-pheny lalanine , N-tert-buty loxycarbonyl-L-aspartic acid benzyl ester, benzoic acid, N-tert-buty loxy carbonylisonipecotic acid, N- methylisonipecotic acid, N-tert-buty loxycarbonylnipecotic acid, N-tert- butyloxycarbonyl-L-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carboxylic acid, N-(toluene-4- sulfonyl)-L-proline and the like.
Alternatively, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a primary or secondary amino group can be N-acylated using an acyl halide or a carboxylic acid anhydride to form the corresponding amide. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of the acyl halide or carboxylic acid anhydride in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about of about -70°C to about 40°C for about 1 to about 24 hours. If desired, an acylation catalyst such as 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)pyridine may be used to promote the acylation reaction. The acylation reaction is preferably conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamme, N-methylmorpholine and the like. Alternatively, the reaction can be conducted under Schotten- Baumann-type conditions using aqueous alkali, such as sodium hydroxide and the like.
Examples of acyl halides and carboxylic acid anhydrides suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, 2-methylpropionyl chloride, trimethylacetyl chloride, phenylacetyl chloride, benzoyl chloride, 2-bromobenzoyl chloride, 2-methylbenzoyl chloride, 2-trifluoro- methylbenzoyl chloride, isonicotinoyl chloride, nicotinoyl chloride, picolinoyl chloride, acetic anhydride, succinic anhydride, and the like.
Carbamyl chlorides, such as N,N-dimethylcarbamyl chloride, N,N- diethylcarbamyl chloride and the like, can also be used in this reaction to provide ureas. Similarly, dicarbonates, such as di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, may be employed to provide carbamates.
In a similar manner, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a primary or secondary amino group may be N- sulfonated to form a sulfonamide using a sulfonyl halide or a sulfonic acid anhydride. Sulfonyl halides and sulfonic acid anhydrides suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, methanesulfonyl chloride, chloromethanesulfonyl chloride, /?-toluenesulfonyl chloride, trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride, and the like. Similarly, sulfamoyl chlorides, such as dimethylsulfamoyl chloride, can be used to provide sulfamides (e.g., > N-S02-N < ) .
Additionally, a primary and secondary amino group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof can be reacted with an isocyanate or a thioisocyanate to give a urea or thiourea, respectively. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.2 equivalents, of the isocyanate or thioisocyanate in an inert diluent, such as toluene and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 24 °C to about 37 °C for about 12 to about 24 hours. The isocyanates and thioisocyanates used in this reaction are commercially available or can be prepared from commercially available compounds using well-known synthetic procedures.
For example, isocyanates and thioisocyanates are readily prepared by reacting the appropriate amine with phosgene or thiophosgene. Examples of isocyanates and thioisocyanates suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, ethyl isocyanate, n-propyl isocyanate, 4-cyanophenyl isocyanate, 3-methoxyphenyl isocyanate, 2-phenylethyl isocyanate, methyl thioisocyanate, ethyl thioisocyanate, 2-phenylethyl thioisocyanate, 3- phenylpropyl thioisocyanate, 3-(N,N-diethylamino)propyl thioisocyanate, phenyl thioisocyanate, benzyl thioisocyanate, 3-pyridyl thioisocyanate, fluorescein isothiocyanate (isomer I) and the like.
Furthermore, when a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof contains a primary or secondary amino group, the amino group can be reductively alkylated using aldehydes or ketones to form a secondary or tertiary amino group. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the amino compound with at least one equivalent, preferably about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents, of an aldehyde or ketone and at least one equivalent based on the amino compound of a metal hydride reducing agent, such as sodium cyanoborohydride, in an inert diluent, such as methanol, tetrahydrofuran, mixtures thereof and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 50 °C for about 1 to about 72 hours. Aldehydes and ketones suitable for use in this reaction include, by way of example, benzaldehyde, 4-chlorobenzaldehyde, valeraldehyde and the like.
In a similar manner, when a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof has a substituent containing a hydroxyl group, the hydroxyl group can be further modified or derivatized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide, by way of example, ethers, carbamates and the like. Compounds having a hydroxyl group on the R5 substituent, for example, can be prepared using an amino acid derivative of formula VI derived from tyrosine and the like in the above-described reactions.
By way of example, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing a hydroxyl group, such as where R5 is a (4-hydroxyphenyl)methyl group, can be readily O-alkylated to form ethers. This O-alkylation reaction is typically conducted by contacting the hydroxy compound with a suitable alkali or alkaline earth metal base, such as potassium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as acetone, 2-butanone and the like, to form the alkali or alkaline earth metal salt of the hydroxyl group. This salt is generally not isolated, but is reacted in situ with at least one equivalent of an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide or sulfonate, such as an alkyl chloride, bromide, iodide, mesylate or tosylate, to afford the ether. Generally, this reaction is conducted at a temperature ranging from about 60°C to about 150°C for about 24 to about 72 hours. Preferably, a catalytic amount of sodium or potassium iodide is added to the reaction mixture when an alkyl chloride or bromide is employed in the reaction.
Examples of alkyl or substituted alkyl halides and sulfonates suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, tert-butyl bromoacetate, N-tert-butyl chloroacetamide, 1-bromoethylbenzene, ethyl α- bromophenylacetate, 2-(N-ethyl-N-phenylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N- ethylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N-diisopropylamino)ethyl chloride, 2-(N,N- dibenzylamino)ethyl chloride, 3-(N,N-ethylamino)propyl chloride, 3-(N- benzyl-N-methylamino)propyl chloride, N-(2-chloroethyl)mo holine, 2-
(hexamethyleneimino)ethyl chloride, 3-(N-methylpiperazine)propyl chloride, l-(3-chlorophenyl)-4-(3-chloropropyl)piperazine, 2-(4-hydroxy-4- phenylpiperidine)ethyl chloride, N-tert-buty loxycarbony 1-3- piperidinemethyl tosylate, and the like.
Alternatively, a hydroxyl group present on a substituent of a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof can be O-alkylating using the Mitsunobu reaction. In this reaction, an alcohol, such as 3-(N,N- dimethylamino)-l-propanol and the like, is reacted with about 1.0 to about 1.3 equivalents of triphenylphosphine and about 1.0 to about 1.3 equivalents of diethyl azodicarboxylate in an inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from about -10°C to about 5°C for about 0.25 to about 1 hour. About 1.0 to about 1.3 equivalents of a hydroxy compound, such as N-tert-buty Ityrosine methyl ester, is then added and the reaction mixture is stirred at a temperature of about 0°C to about
30°C for about 2 to about 48 hours to provide the 0-alkylated product.
In a similar manner, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof containing a aryl hydroxy group can be reacted with an aryl iodide to provide a diaryl ether. Generally, this reaction is conducted by forming the alkali metal salt of the hydroxyl group using a suitable base, such as sodium hydride, in an inert diluent such as xylenes at a temperature of about -25 °C to about 10°C. The salt is then treated with about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of cuprous bromide dimethyl sulfide complex at a temperature ranging from about 10°C to about 30 °C for about 0.5 to about
2.0 hours, followed by about 1.1 to about 1.5 equivalents of an aryl iodide, such as sodium 2-iodobenzoate and the like. The reaction is then heated to about 70 °C to about 150°C for about 2 to about 24 hours to provide the diaryl ether.
Additionally, a hydroxy-containing compound can also be readily derivatized to form a carbamate. In one method for preparing such carbamates, a hydroxy compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof is contacted with about 1.0 to about 1.2 equivalents of 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -25 °C to about 0°C for about 0.5 to about 2.0 hours. Treatment of the resulting carbonate with an excess, preferably about 2 to about 5 equivalents, of a trialkylamine, such as triethylamine, for about 0.5 to 2 hours, followed by about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a primary or secondary amine provides the carbamate. Examples of amines suitable for using in this reaction include, but are not limited to, piperazine, 1-methylpiperazine, 1-acetylpiperazine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, pyrrolidine, piperidine and the like.
Alternatively, in another method for preparing carbamates, a hydroxy-containing compound is contacted with about 1.0 to about 1.5 equivalents of a carbamyl chloride in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about 25 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 to about 72 hours. Typically, this reaction is conducted in the presence of a suitable base to scavenge the acid generated during the reaction. Suitable bases include, by way of example, tertiary amines, such as triethylamine, diisopropylethylamine, N-methylmorpholine and the like. Additionally, at least one equivalent (based on the hydroxy compound) of 4-(N,N-dimethylamino)pyridine is preferably added to the reaction mixture to facilitate the reaction. Examples of carbamyl chlorides suitable for use in this reaction include, by way of example, dimethylcarbamyl chloride, diethylcarbamyl chloride and the like.
Likewise, when a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof contains a primary or secondary hydroxyl group, such hydroxyl groups can be readily converted into a leaving group and displaced to form, for example, amines, sulfides and fluorides. For example, derivatives of 4- hy droxy -L-proline can be converted into the corresponding 4-amino, 4-thio or 4-fluoro-L-proline derivatives via nucleophilic displacement of the derivatized hydroxyl group. Generally, when a chiral compound is employed in these reactions, the stereochemistry at the carbon atom attached to the derivatized hydroxyl group is typically inverted.
These reactions are typically conducted by first converting the hydroxyl group into a leaving group, such as a tosylate, by treatment of the hydroxy compound with at least one equivalent of a sulfonyl halide, such as / oluenesulfonyl chloride and the like, in pyridine. This reaction is generally conducted at a temperature of from about 0°C to about 70 °C for about 1 to about 48 hours. The resulting tosylate can then be readily displaced with sodium azide, for example, by contacting the tosylate with at least one equivalent of sodium azide in an inert diluent, such as a mixture of N,N-dimethy If ormamide and water, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 37 °C for about 1 to about 12 hours to provide the corresponding azido compound. The azido group can then be reduced by, for example, hydrogenation using a palladium on carbon catalyst to provide the amino (-NH2) compound.
Similarly, a tosylate group can be readily displaced by a thiol to form a sulfide. This reaction is typically conducted by contacting the tosylate with at least one equivalent of a thiol, such as thiophenol, in the presence of a suitable base, such as l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene (DBU), in an inert diluent, such as N,N-dimethylformamide, at a temperature of from about 0°C to about 37°C for about 1 to about 12 hours to provide the sulfide. Additionally, treatment of a tosylate with morpholinosulfur trifluoride in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 37 °C for about 12 to about 24 hours affords the corresponding fluoro compound.
Furthermore, a compound of formula I or an intermediate thereof having a substituent containing an iodoaryl group, for example, when R? is a (4-iodophenyl)methyl group, can be readily converted either before or after the above coupling reactions into a biaryl compound. Typically, this reaction is conducted by treating the iodoaryl compound with about 1.1 to about 2 equivalents of an arylzinc iodide, such as 2-
(methoxycarbonyl)phenylzinc iodide, in the presence of a palladium catalyst, such as palladium tetra(triphenylphosphine), in an inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from about 24 °C to about 30°C until reaction completion. This reaction is further described, for example, in Rieke, /. Org. Chem. 1991, 56, 1445.
In some cases, the compounds of formula I or I A or intermediates thereof may contain substituents having one or more sulfur atoms. Such sulfur atoms will be present, for example, when the amino acid of formula II employed in the above reactions is derived from L-thiazolidine-4- carboxylic acid, L-(5,5-dimethyl)thiazolidine-4-carboxylic acid, L- thiamoφholine-3 -carboxylic acid and the like. When present, such sulfur atoms can be oxidized either before or after the above coupling reactions to provide a sulfoxide or sulfone compound using conventional reagents and reaction conditions. Suitable reagents for oxidizing a sulfide compound to a sulfoxide include, by way of example, hydrogen peroxide, 3- chloroperoxybenzoic acid (MCPBA), sodium periodate and the like. The oxidation reaction is typically conducted by contacting the sulfide compound with about 0.95 to about 1.1 equivalents of the oxidizing reagent in an inert diluent, such as dichloromethane, at a temperature ranging from about -50 °C to about 75 °C for about 1 to about 24 hours. The resulting sulfoxide can then be further oxidized to the corresponding sulfone by contacting the sulfoxide with at least one additional equivalent of an oxidizing reagent, such as hydrogen peroxide, MCPBA, potassium permanganate and the like. Alternatively, the sulfone can be prepared directly by contacting the sulfide with at least two equivalents, and preferably an excess, of the oxidizing reagent. Such reactions are described further in March, "Advanced Organic Chemistry", 4th Ed., pp. 1201-1202, Wiley Publisher, 1992.
As described above, the compounds of formula I having an R2 substituent other an hydrogen can be prepared using an N-substituted amino acid of formula II, such as sarcosine, N-methyl-L-pheny lalanine and the like, in the above-described coupling reactions. Alternatively, such compounds can be prepared by N-alkylation of a sulfonamide of formula I or IV (where R2 is hydrogen) using conventional synthetic procedures. Typically, this N-alkylation reaction is conducted by contacting the sulfonamide with at least one equivalent, preferably 1.1 to 2 equivalents, of an alkyl or substituted alkyl halide in the presence of a suitable base, such as potassium carbonate, in an inert diluent, such as acetone, 2-butanone and the like, at a temperature ranging from about 25 °C to about 70 °C for about 2 to about 48 hours. Examples of alkyl or substituted alkyl halides suitable for use in this reaction include, but are not limited to, methyl iodide, and the like.
Additionally, the sulfonamides of formula I or IV wherein R2 is hydrogen and R1 is a 2-alkoxycarbonylaryl group can be intramolecularly cyclized to form 1 ,2-benzisothiazol-3-one derivatives or analogues thereof. This reaction is typically conducted by treating a sulfonamide, such as N- (2-methoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl)glycine-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester, with about 1.0 to 1.5 equivalents of a suitable base, such as an alkali metal hydride, in a inert diluent, such as tetrahydrofuran, at a temperature ranging from about 0°C to about 30 °C for about 2 to about 48 hours to afford the cyclized 1 ,2-benzisothiazol-3-one derivative.
Lastly, the compounds of formula I where Q is -C(S)ΝR7- are can prepared by using an amino thionoacid derivative in place of amino acid II in the above described synthetic procedures. Such amino thionoacid derivatives can be prepared by the procedures described in Shalaky, et al., J. Org. Chem., 61:9045-9048 (1996) and Brain, et al., J. Org. Chem.,
62:3808-3809 (1997) and references cited therein.
Pharmaceutical Formulations
When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of formula I and IA are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula
I and I A above associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi- solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhy droxy - benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about
10 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face masks tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
The following formulation examples illustrate the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
Formulation Example 1
Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule
Active Ingredient 30.0 Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearate 5.0
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 2
A tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablef)
Active Ingredient 25.0
Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0
Stearic acid 5.0 The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
Ingredient Weight %
Active Ingredient 5 Lactose 95
The active mixture is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance.
Formulation Example 4 Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient dng/tablet)
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone
(as 10% solution in water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 1.0 mg
Total 120 mg
The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60 °C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 150 mg.
Formulation Example 5
Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 40.0 mg
Starch 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg Total 150.0 mg
The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, an magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 6
Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 25 mg Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg
The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
Formulation Example 7 Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 ml dose are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount Active Ingredient 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11 %)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose 1.75 g Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to 5.0 ml
The medicament, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Formulation Example 8
Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule^
Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg
Total 425.0 mg
The active ingredient, cellulose, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 560 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 9
An intravenous formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 250.0 mg
Isotonic saline 1000 ml
Formulation Example 10 A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 1-10 g
Emulsifying Wax 30 g Liquid Paraffin 20 g
White Soft Paraffin to 100 g
The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid. Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Direct techniques can be used when it is desirable or necessary to introduce the pharmaceutical composition to the brain, either directly or indirectly. Direct techniques usually involve placement of a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier. One such implantable delivery system used for the transport of biological factors to specific anatomical regions of the body is described in U.S. Patent 5,011,472 which is herein incoφorated by reference.
Indirect techniques, which are generally preferred, usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophilic drugs into lipid-soluble drugs. Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier. Alternatively, the delivery of hydrophilic drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier. Utility
The compounds of this invention can be employed to bind VLA-4 ^β! integrin) in biological samples and, accordingly have utility in, for example, assaying such samples for VLA-4. In such assays, the compounds can be bound to a solid support and the VLA-4 sample added thereto. The amount of VLA-4 in the sample can be determined by conventional methods such as use of a sandwich ELISA assay. Alternatively, labeled VLA-4 can be used in a competitive binding assay to measure for the presence of VLA-4 in the sample. Other suitable assays are well known in the art.
In addition, certain of the compounds of this invention inhibit, in vivo, adhesion of leukocytes to endothelial cells mediated by VLA-4 and, accordingly, can be used in the treatment of diseases mediated by VLA-4. Such diseases include inflammatory diseases in mammalian patients such as asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetes), inflammatory bowel disease (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis, meningitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
The biological activity of the compounds identified above may be assayed in a variety of systems. For example, a compound can be immobilized on a solid surface and adhesion of cells expressing VLA-4 can be measured. Using such formats, large numbers of compounds can be screened. Cells suitable for this assay include any leukocytes known to express VLA-4 such as T cells, B cells, monocytes, eosinophils, and basophils. A number of leukocyte cell lines can also be used, examples include Jurkat and U937.
The test compounds can also be tested for the ability to competitively inhibit binding between VLA-4 and VCAM-1, or between VLA-4 and a labeled compound known to bind VLA-4 such as a compound of this invention or antibodies to VLA-4. In these assays, the VCAM-1 can be immobilized on a solid surface. VCAM-1 may also be expressed as a recombinant fusion protein having an Ig tail (e.g., IgG) so that binding to VLA-4 may be detected in an immunoassay. Alternatively, VCAM-1 expressing cells, such as activated endothelial cells or VCAM-1 transfected fibroblasts can be used. For assays to measure the ability to block adhesion to brain endothelial cells, the assays described in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 91/05038 are particularly preferred. This application is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.
Many assay formats employ labelled assay components. The labelling systems can be in a variety of forms. The label may be coupled directly or indirectly to the desired component of the assay according to methods well known in the art. A wide variety of labels may be used. The component may be labelled by any one of several methods. The most common method of detection is the use of autoradiography with 3H, 1 51, 35S, 14C, or 32P labelled compounds and the like. Non-radioactive labels include ligands which bind to labelled antibodies, fluorophores, chemiluminescent agents, enzymes and antibodies which can serve as specific binding pair members for a labelled ligand. The choice of label depends on sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with the compound, stability requirements, and available instrumentation. Appropriate in vivo models for demonstrating efficacy in treating inflammatory responses include EAE (experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis) in mice, rats, guinea pigs or primates, as well as other inflammatory models dependent upon α4 integrins.
Compounds having the desired biological activity may be modified as necessary to provide desired properties such as improved pharmacological properties (e.g., in vivo stability, bio-availability), or the ability to be detected in diagnostic applications. For instance, inclusion of one or more D-amino acids in the sulfonamides of this invention typically increases in vivo stability. Stability can be assayed in a variety of ways such as by measuring the half-life of the proteins during incubation with peptidases or human plasma or serum. A number of such protein stability assays have been described (see, e.g., Verhoef et al., Eur. J. Drug Metab. Pharmacokinet., 1990, 15i2):83-93).
For diagnostic puφoses, a wide variety of labels may be linked to the compounds, which may provide, directly or indirectly, a detectable signal. Thus, the compounds of the subject invention may be modified in a variety of ways for a variety of end puφoses while still retaining biological activity. In addition, various reactive sites may be introduced at the terminus for linking to particles, solid substrates, macromolecules, and the like.
Labeled compounds can be used in a variety of in vivo or in vitro applications. A wide variety of labels may be employed, such as radionuclides (e.g., gamma-emitting radioisotopes such as technetium-99 or indium-Ill), fluorescers (e.g., fluorescein), enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chemiluminescent compounds, bioluminescent compounds, and the like. Those of ordinary skill in the art will know of other suitable labels for binding to the complexes, or will be able to ascertain such using routine experimentation. The binding of these labels is achieved using standard techniques common to those of ordinary skill in the art.
In vitro uses include diagnostic applications such as monitoring inflammatory responses by detecting the presence of leukocytes expressing VLA-4. The compounds of this invention can also be used for isolating or labeling such cells. In addition, as mentioned above, the compounds of the invention can be used to assay for potential inhibitors of VLA-4/ VCAM-1 interactions.
For in vivo diagnostic imaging to identify, e.g., sites of inflammation, radioisotopes are typically used in accordance with well known techniques. The radioisotopes may be bound to the peptide either directly or indirectly using intermediate functional groups. For instance, chelating agents such as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTP A) and ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and similar molecules have been used to bind proteins to metallic ion radioisotopes.
The complexes can also be labeled with a paramagnetic isotope for puφoses of in vivo diagnosis, as in magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) or electron spin resonance (ESR), both of which are well known. In general, any conventional method for visualizing diagnostic images can be used. Usually gamma- and positron-emitting radioisotopes are used for camera imaging and paramagnetic isotopes are used for MRI. Thus, the compounds can be used to monitor the course of amelioration of an inflammatory response in an individual. By measuring the increase or decrease in lymphocytes expressing VLA-4 it is possible to determine whether a particular therapeutic regimen aimed at ameliorating the disease is effective.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be used to block or inhibit cellular adhesion associated with a number of diseases and disorders. For instance, a number of inflammatory disorders are associated with integrins or leukocytes. Treatable disorders include, e.g., transplantation rejection (e.g., allograft rejection), Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetes), retinitis, cancer metastases, rheumatoid arthritis, acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury (e.g., adult respiratory distress syndrome), asthma, nephritis, and acute and chronic inflammation, including atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia, and inflammatory bowel disease (including Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis). In preferred embodiments the pharmaceutical compositions are used to treat inflammatory brain disorders, such as multiple sclerosis (MS), viral meningitis and encephalitis.
Inflammatory bowel disease is a collective term for two similar diseases referred to as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis. Crohn's disease is an idiopathic, chronic ulceroconstrictive inflammatory disease characterized by shaφly delimited and typically transmural involvement of all layers of the bowel wall by a granulomatous inflammatory reaction. Any segment of the gastrointestinal tract, from the mouth to the anus, may be involved, although the disease most commonly affects the terminal ileum and/or colon. Ulcerative colitis is an inflammatory response limited largely to the colonic mucosa and submucosa. Lymphocytes and macrophages are numerous in lesions of inflammatory bowel disease and may contribute to inflammatory injury. Asthma is a disease characterized by increased responsiveness of the tracheobronchial tree to various stimuli potentiating paroxysmal constriction of the bronchial airways. The stimuli cause release of various mediators of inflammation from IgE-coated mast cells including histamine, eosinophilic and neutrophilic chemotactic factors, leukotrines, prostaglandin and platelet activating factor. Release of these factors recruits basophils, eosinophils and neutrophils, which cause inflammatory injury.
Atherosclerosis is a disease of arteries (e.g., coronary, carotid, aorta and iliac). The basic lesion, the atheroma, consists of a raised focal plaque within the intima, having a core of lipid and a covering fibrous cap. Atheromas compromise arterial blood flow and weaken affected arteries. Myocardial and cerebral infarcts are a major consequence of this disease. Macrophages and leukocytes are recruited to atheromas and contribute to inflammatory injury.
Rheumatoid arthritis is a chronic, relapsing inflammatory disease that primarily causes impairment and destruction of joints. Rheumatoid arthritis usually first affects the small joints of the hands and feet but then may involve the wrists, elbows, ankles and knees. The arthritis results from interaction of synovial cells with leukocytes that infiltrate from the circulation into the synovial lining of the joints. See e.g., Paul, Immunology (3d ed., Raven Press, 1993).
Another indication for the compounds of this invention is in treatment of organ or graft rejection mediated by VLA-4. Over recent years there has been a considerable improvement in the efficiency of surgical techniques for transplanting tissues and organs such as skin, kidney, liver, heart, lung, pancreas and bone marrow. Perhaps the principal outstanding problem is the lack of satisfactory agents for inducing immunotolerance in the recipient to the transplanted allograft or organ. When allogenetic cells or organs are transplanted into a host (i.e. , the donor and donee are different individuals from the same species), the host immune system is likely to mount an immune response to foreign antigens in the transplant
(host-versus-graft disease) leading to destruction of the transplanted tissue. CD8+ cells, CD4 cells and monocytes are all involved in the rejection of transplant tissues. Compounds of this invention which bind to alpha-4 integrin are useful, inter alia, to block alloantigen-induced immune responses in the donee thereby preventing such cells from participating in the destruction of the transplanted tissue or organ. See, e.g., Paul et al., Transplant International 9, 420-425 (1996); Georczynski et al., Immunology 87, 573-580 (1996); Georcyznski et al., Transplant. Immunol. 3, 55-61 (1995); Yang et al. , Transplantation 60, 71-76 (1995); Anderson et al. , APMIS 102, 23-27 (1994).
A related use for compounds of this invention which bind to VLA-4 is in modulating the immune response involved in "graft versus host" disease (GVHD). See e.g., Schlegel et al. , J. Immunol. 155, 3856-3865 (1995). GVHD is a potentially fatal disease that occurs when immunologically competent cells are transferred to an allogenetic recipient. In this situation, the donor's immunocompetent cells may attack tissues in the recipient. Tissues of the skin, gut epithelia and liver are frequent targets and may be destroyed during the course of GVHD. The disease presents an especially severe problem when immune tissue is being transplanted, such as in bone marrow transplantation; but less severe GVHD has also been reported in other cases as well, including heart and liver transplants. The therapeutic agents of the present invention are used, ter alia, to block activation of the donor T-cells thereby interfering with their ability to lyse target cells in the host. A further use of the compounds of this invention is inhibiting tumor metastasis. Several tumor cells have been reported to express VLA-4 and compounds which bind VLA-4 block adhesion of such cells to endothelial cells. Steinback et al., Urol. Res. 23, 175-83 (1995); Orosz et al., Int. J. Cancer 60, 867-71 (1995); Freedman et al., Leuk. Lymphoma 13, 47-52
(1994); Okahara et al., Cancer Res. 54, 3233-6 (1994).
A further use of the compounds of this invention is in treating multiple sclerosis. Multiple sclerosis is a progressive neurological autoimmune disease that affects an estimated 250,000 to 350,000 people in the United
States. Multiple sclerosis is thought to be the result of a specific autoimmune reaction in which certain leukocytes attack and initiate the destruction of myelin, the insulating sheath covering nerve fibers. In an animal model for multiple sclerosis, murine monoclonal antibodies directed against VLA-4 have been shown to block the adhesion of leukocytes to the endothelium, and thus prevent inflammation of the central nervous system and subsequent paralysis in the animals16.
Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems. Suitable formulations for use in the present invention are found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985).
In order to enhance serum half-life, the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds. A variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871, 4,501,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is incoφorated herein by reference. The amount administered to the patient will vary depending upon what is being administered, the puφose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "therapeutically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the disease condition being treated as well as by the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the severity of the inflammation, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
The compositions administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. The resulting aqueous solutions may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to
9 and most preferably from 7 to 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts.
The therapeutic dosage of the compounds of the present invention will vary according to, for example, the particular use for which the treatment is made, the manner of administration of the compound, the health and condition of the patient, and the judgment of the prescribing physician. For example, for intravenous administration, the dose will typically be in the range of about 20 μg to about 500 μg per kilogram body weight, preferably about 100 μg to about 300 μg per kilogram body weight. Suitable dosage ranges for intranasal administration are generally about 0.1 pg to 1 mg per kilogram body weight. Effective doses can be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems.
The following synthetic and biological examples are offered to illustrate this invention and are not to be construed in any way as limiting the scope of this invention. Unless otherwise stated, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius.
EXAMPLES
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning. aq or aq. aqueous
AcOH acetic acid bd broad doublet bm broad multiplet bs broad singlet
Bn benzyl
Boc N-tert-butoxylcarbonyl
Boc20 di-tert-butyl dicarbonate
BOP benzotriazol- 1 -yloxy- tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate
Cbz carbobenzyloxy
CHC13 chloroform H2 12 dichloromethane
(COCl)2 oxalyl chloride d doublet dd doublet of doublets dt doublet of triplets
DBU 1 , 8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0]undec-7-ene
DCC 1 ,3-dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
DMAP 4-N,N-dimethylaminopyridine
DME ethylene glycol dimethyl ether
DMF N, N-dimethy If ormamide DMSO = dimethylsulfoxide
EDC = l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3- ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
Et3N = triethylamine
Et20 = diethyl ether
EtOAc = ethyl acetate
EtOH = ethanol eq or eq. = equivalent
Fmoc = N-(9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl)
FmocONSu = N-(9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl> succinimide g = grams h = hour
H20 = water
HBr = hydrobromic acid
HC1 = hydrochloric acid
HOBT = 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate hr = hour
K2C03 = potassium carbonate
L = liter m = multiplet
MeOH = methanol mg = milligram
MgS04 = magnesium sulfate mL = milliliter mm = millimeter mM = millimolar mmol = millimol mp = melting point
N = normal
NaCl = sodium chloride
Na2C03 = sodium carbonate
NaHC03 = sodium bicarbonate
NaOEt = sodium ethoxide
NaOH = sodium hydroxide
NH4C1 = ammonium chloride
NMM = N-methylmoφholine
Phe = L-phenylalanine
Pro = L-proline psi = pounds per square inch
Pt02 = platinum oxide q = quartet quint. = quintet rt = room temperature s singlet sat saturated t triplet t-BuOH tert-butanol
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
THF tetrahydrofuran
TLC or tic thin layer chromatography
Ts tosyl
TsCl tosyl chloride
TsOH tosylate μL microliter
In the examples below, all temperatures are in degrees Celcius (unless otherwise indicated). The following Methods were used to prepare the compounds set forth below as indicated.
Method 1 N-Tosylation Procedure N-Tosylation of the appropriate amino acid was conducted via the method of Cupps, Boutin and Rapoport . Org. Chem. 1985, 50, 3972.
Method 2 Methyl Ester Preparation Procedure Amino acid methyl esters were prepared using the method of Brenner and Huber Helv. Chim. Acta 1953, 36, 1109.
Method 3 BOP Coupling Procedure The desired dipeptide ester was prepared by the reaction of a suitable
Ν-protected amino acid (1 equivalent) with the appropriate amino acid ester or amino acid ester hydrochloride (1 equivalent), benzotriazol-1-yloxy- tris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate [BOP] (2.0 equivalent), triethylamine (1.1 equivalent), and DMF. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude product is purified flash chromatography to afford the dipeptide ester.
Method 4 Hydrogenation Procedure I
Hydrogenation was performed using 10% palladium on carbon (10% by weight) in methanol at 30 psi overnight. The mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite and the filtrate concentrated to yield the desired amino compound.
Method 5 Hydrolysis Procedure I To a chilled (0°C) THF/H20 solution (2:1, 5 - 10 mL) of the appropriate ester was added LiOH (or NaOH) (0.95 equivalents). The temperature was maintained at 0°C and the reaction was complete in 1-3 hours. The reaction mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate and the aqueous phase was lyophilized resulting in the desired carboxylate salt.
Method 6 Ester Hydrolysis Procedure II
To a chilled (0°C) THF/H20 solution (2:1, 5 - 10 mL) of the appropriate ester was added LiOH (1.1 equivalents). The temperature was maintained at 0°C and the reaction was complete in 1-3 hours. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was taken up into H2O and the pH adjusted to 2-3 with aqueous HCl. The product was extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phase was washed with brine, dried over MgS04, filtered and concentrated to yield the desired acid. Method 7 Ester Hydrolysis Procedure III The appropriate ester was dissolved in dioxane/H20 (1:1) and 0.9 equivalents of 0.5 N NaOH was added. The reaction was stirred for 3-16 hours and then concentrated. The resulting residue was dissolved in Ufi and extracted with ethyl acetate. The aqueous phase was lyophilized to yield the desired carboxylate sodium salt.
Method 8 Sulfonylation Procedure I
To the appropriately protected aminopheny lalanine analog (11.2 mmol), dissolved in methylene chloride (25ml) and cooled to -78 °C was added the desired sulfonyl chloride (12 mmol) followed by dropwise addition of pyridine (2 mL). The solution was allowed to warm to room temperature and was stirred for 48 hr. The reaction solution was transferred to a 250 mL separatory funnel with methylene chloride (100 mL) and extracted with IN HCl (50 mL x 3), brine (50 mL), and water (100 mL). The organic phase was dried (MgS04) and the solvent concentrated to yield the desired product.
Method 9 Reductive Amination Procedure Reductive amination of Tos-Pro-p-NH2-Phe with the appropriate aldehyde was conducted using acetic acid, sodium triacetoxyborohydride, methylene chloride and the combined mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography. Method 10 BOC Removal Procedure Anhydrous hydrochloride (HCl) gas was bubbled through a methanolic solution of the appropriate Boc-amino acid ester at 0°C for 15 minutes and the reaction mixture was stirred for three hours. The solution was concentrated to a syrup and dissolved in Et20 and reconcentrated. This procedure was repeated and the resulting solid was placed under high vacuum overnight.
Method 11 rert-Butyl Ester Hydrolysis Procedure I The tert-butyl ester was dissolved in CH2C12 and treated with TFA. The reaction was complete in 1-3 hr at which time the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue dissolved in H20 and lyophilized to yield the desired acid.
Method 12 EDC Coupling Procedure I To a CH2C12 solution (5-20 mL) of N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-proline (1 equivalent), the appropriate amino acid ester hydrochloride (1 equivalent),
N-methylmoφholine (1.1-2.2 equivalents) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (2 equivalents) were mixed, placed in an ice bath and l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide (1.1 equivalents) added. The reaction was allowed to rise to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into H20 and the organic phase was washed with sat. NaHC03, brine, dried (MgS04 or Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography. Method 13 EDC Coupling Procedure II To a DMF solution (5-20 mL) of the appropriate N-protected amino acid (1 equivalent), the appropriated amino acid ester hydrochloride (1 equivalent), Et3N (1.1 equivalents) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole (2 equivalents) were mixed, placed in an ice bath and l-(3- dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethyl carbodiimide (1.1 equivalents) added. The reaction was allowed to rise to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was partitioned between EtOAc and H20 and the organic phase washed with 0.2 N citric acid, H20, sat. NaHC03, and brine, then dried (MgS04 or Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography or preparative TLC.
Method 14 Sulfonylation Procedure II
The appropriate sulfonyl chloride was dissolved in CH2C12 and placed in an ice bath. L-Pro-L-Phe-OMe «HC1 (1 equivalent) and E^N (1.1 equivalent) was added and the reaction allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnight under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue partitioned between
EtOAc and H20 and the organic phase washed with sat. NaHCOj, brine, dried (MgS04 or Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography or preparative TLC.
Method 15
Sulfonylation Procedure III To a solution of L-Pro-L-4-(3-dimethylaminopropyloxy)-Phe-OMe [prepared using the procedure described in Method 10] (1 equivalent) in CH2C12 was added Et3N (5 equivalents) followed by the appropriate sulfonyl chloride (1.1 equivalent). The reaction was allowed to warm to room temperature and stirred overnite under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The mixture was concentrated, dissolved in EtOAc, washed with sat. NaHC03 and 0.2 N citric acid. The aqueous phase was made basic with solid NaHC03 and the product extracted with EtOAc. The organic phase was washed with brine, dried (MgS04 or Na2S04), filtered and concentrated. The crude methyl ester was purified by preparative TLC. The corresponding acid was prepared using the procedure described in Method 7.
Method 16
Hydrogenation Procedure II To a methanol (10 -15 mL) solution of the azlactone was added NaOAc (1 equivalent) and 10% Pd/C. This mixture was placed on the hydrogenator at 40 psi H2. After 8 - 16 hours, the reaction mixture was filtered through a pad of Celite and the filtrate concentrated to yield the dehydrodipeptide methyl ester. The ester was dissolved in dioxane/H20 (5- 10 mL), to which was added 0.5 N NaOH (1.05 equivalents). After stirring for 1- 3 hours, the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was redissolved in H20 and washed with EtOAc. The aqueous phase was made acidic with 0.2 N HCl and the product was extracted with
EtOAc. The combined organic phase was washed with brine (1 x 5 mL), dried (MgS04 or Na2S04), filtered and concentrated to yield the acid as approximately a 1:1 mixture of diastereomers.
Method 17
7ert-Butyl Ester Hydrolysis Procedure II The tert-butyl ester was dissolved in CH2C12 (5 mL) and treated with TFA (5 mL). The reaction was complete in 1-3 hours at which time the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue dissolved in H20 and concentrated. The residue was redissolved in H20 and lyophilized to yield the desired product.
Example 1 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)- (2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2S-indoline-2-carboxylic acid (331.2 mg, 1.04 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (5 mL) with 4-methyl moφholine (3.5 eq, 400 μL), BOP (1.1 eq, 506 mg), and phenylalanine benzyl ester (1.0 eq, 444 mg). The dipeptide was isolated as an oil. The benzyl ester was dissolved in EtOH:H20 (1:1) [2.5 mL] containing a catalytic amount of
10% Pd on C and hydrogenated under 50 psi H2. Upon filtration over celite, and evaporation of the solvents under reduced pressure the title material was isolated as a solid, mp = 167-170°C.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.64 (d, IH, J = 8.50 Hz), 7.43
(d, 2H, J = 8.25 Hz), 7.23 (m, 2H), 7.12-7.00 (m, 6H), 6.86 (m, 2H),
4.82 (m, IH), 4.60 (m, IH), 3.12 (m, 3H), 2.62 (m, IH), 2.32 (s, 3H). 13C ΝMR (75 MHz, CD3OD): δ = 174.37, 173.24, 146.90, 142.92,
138.09, 136.61, 133.74, 131.49, 130.92, 129.90, 129.49, 129.13, 128.22,
127.37, 126.78, 119.34, 65.28, 55.44, 38.74, 34.15, 22.03.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB) 465 (M+H).
Example 2
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4- tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carbonyl-L-phenylalanine
Following the experimental procedure described for the synthesis of Example 1 (20), affords the title compound as a white solid, mp = 74-
78°C. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.61 (m, 3H), 7.24-6.85 (m, 10 H), 4.65 (m, IH), 4.55 (m, IH), 4.22 (d, IH, J = 10.5 Hz), 4.05 (d, IH, J = 10.5 Hz), 3.18-2.92 (m, 4H), 2.34 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CD3OD): δ = 174.62, 173.36, 146.96, 138.63,
136.89, 134.17, 131.34, 131.03, 130.12, 129.62, 129.25, 128.87, 128.23, 127.74, 57.59, 56.83, 47.14, 38.75, 31.72, 32.00.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB) 479 (M+H).
Example 3
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)glycine (547 mg, 2.40 mmol) was slurried in
CH2C12 (7 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. Oxalyl chloride (0.30 mL) was added, followed by one drop of DMF. The mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 1 hr. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the acid chloride dissolved in CH2C12 (8 mL) and cooled in an ice bath. Phenylalanine benzyl ester toluensulfonate (919 mg, 2.1 mmol) was added, followed by triethylamine (0.75 mL). The mixture was allowed to slowly warm to room temperature and stirred for 19 hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2C12 (40 mL) and washed with IN HCl (2 x 10 mL), IM ΝaHCQ, (15 mL), brine (10 mL), dried (MgS04), filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography (3:2 Hexane/EtOAc) to give the dipeptide benzyl ester (0.51g, 50%). The - benzyl ester was dissolved in THF (20 mL) and 10% Pd/C (60 mg) was added. The mixture was hydrogenated at 15 psi H2 for 1.5 hr. The mixture was filtered through a pad of diatomaceous earth and evaporated in vacuo to give a residue which was recrystallized from MeOH/CHC^ to give the title compound as a white solid (304 mg, 76%), mp = 157-161 °C. ΝMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CDC13): δ = 12.8 (bs, IH), 8.13 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.86 (d, IH, J = 6.1 Hz), 7.65 (d, 2 H, J = 8.2 Hz), 7.35 (d, 2H, J = 8.2 Hz), 7.29-7.17 (5H), 4.49 (m, IH), 3.01 (dd, IH, J = 5.0, 13.7 Hz), 3.57 (m, 3H), 2.85 (dd, IH, J = 8.5, 13.7 Hz), 2.37 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (CDC13): δ = 172.9, 167.7, 143.0, 137.7, 137.6, 129.9,
129.5, 128.6, 127.0, 53.7, 45.3, 37.2, 21.4.
Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 377 (M+H).
Example 4 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
The product from Example 21 (180) (0.62 mmoles) was added to ethanol (40 mL) and 5% Pd-C (10%) and shaken under 35 psi hydrogen for
16 hours. The reaction mixture was filtered through celite and concentrated. The crude product was crystallized from EtOAc/Hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid (190 mg, 78.5%), mp = 128-
130°C.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ = 7.65 (d, 2H, J = 8.18 Hz); 7.26 (m, 7H); 4.84 (m, IH); 3.73 (q, IH, J = 7.02); 3.58 (d, IH, J = 4.28
Hz); 3.20 (m, 2H); 2.55 (s, 3H); 2.43 (s, 3H).
13C ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 175.23, 168.75, 144.90, 136.50,
133.53, 130.57, 129.89, 129.34, 128.17, 127.75, 54.39, 53.84, 37.82,
37.18, 22.15. - Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 391 (M+H), 413 (M+Na). Example 5
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L- alanyl-L-phenylalanine The title compound was prepared according to the procedure described in Example 4 (41). The crude product was crystallized from E^O/Hexane to yield a white solid, mp = 105 -108°C.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 7.72 (d, 2H, J = 8.06 Hz); 7.26 (m, 6H), 7.09 (d, 2H, 7.63 Hz); 6.84 (d, IH, J = 7.69 Hz); 5.46 (d, IH,
J = 7.70 Hz); 4.71 (m, IH); 3.77 (m, 2H); 3.09 (m, 2H); 2.41 (s, 3H);
1.14 (d, 3H, J = 7.14 Hz).
13C NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 174.60, 172.17, 144.69, 136.79,
136.19, 130.47, 129.93, 129.26, 129.20, 127.80, 127.72, 53.94, 53.05, 37.74, 22.17, 19.71.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 391 (M+H), 413 (M+Na).
Example 6
Synthesis of N-(2-Methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)- glycyl-L-phenylalanine
The title compound was prepared according to the procedure described for Example 4 (41), yielding a white solid, mp = 140-143 °C.
ΝMR data was as follows: Η ΝMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): δ = 7.75 (m, 2H); 7.50 (m, 2H); 7.02
(m, 5H); 4.32 (m, IH); 3.74 (s, 3H); 3.44 (d, 2H, J = 7.57 Hz); 2.91 (m, IH); 2.72 (m, IH).
13C ΝMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): δ = 170.66, 169.90, 140.00, 138.73, 134.49, 133.15, 131.96, 131.05, 130.95, 130.92, 130.01, 129.96, 128.35, 55.79, 54.29, 46.98, 38.08, 31.23.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 421 (M+H), 443 (M+Νa). Example 7
Synthesis of
N-(2-Methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)-
L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine The title compound was prepared according to the procedure described in Example 4 (41), yielding a glassy semi-solid.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDClj, 300 MHz): δ = 8.02 (d, IH, J = 7.14 Hz); 7.84
(d, IH, J = 7.15 Hz); 7.62 (m, 2H); 7.20 (m, 6H); 6.50 (d, IH, J = 6.59 Hz); 4.71 (m, IH); 3.98 (s, 3H); 3.87 (m, IH); 3.10 (m, 2H); 1.14 (d,
3H, / = 7.14 Hz).
13C NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 175.08, 172.26, 168.58, 138.99,
136.47, 133.47, 132.58, 131.63, 130.78, 130.51, 129.95, 129.15, 127.65,
54.12, 54.01, 53.68, 37.93, 19.23. Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 435 (M+H).
Preparative Example A
Synthesis of N-(Saccharin-2-yl)- glycyl-L-phenylalanine
To L-prolyl-L-pheny lalanine benzyl ester (4.64 mmoles) in THF (15 mL) was added triethylamine (4.70 mmoles) and the reaction proceeded for
30 minutes at room temperature. The reaction mixture was chilled to 0°C and methyl 2-(chlorosulfonyl) benzoate (4.64 mmoles) was added and the reaction proceeded for 4 hours at room temperature. The reaction was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL) and water (50 mL), and the combined organic layers were successively washed with sat. NaHC03 (50 mL) and sat NaCl (2 x 50 mL), dried over MgS04, filtered and rotovaped to yield a colorless oil (2.30 g, 90%). The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (50% EtOAc/Hexane, Rf = 0.47) to yield N-(2-
Methoxycarbonylphenylsulfonyl)-L-prolyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester as a colorless oil (1.49 g, 58%).
Sodium hydride (1.47 mmoles, washed free of mineral oil) in THF (10 mL) was chilled to 0°C, and a solution of N-(2-methoxycarbonyl- phenyl)sulfonyl-L-glycine-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester in THF (5 mL) was added dropwise. The reaction was stirred at 0°C for one hour and then at room temperature for two hours. The reaction mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 100 mL) and 0.2 Ν HCl (50 mL), the combined EtOAc layers were washed successively with 0.2 Ν HCl (50 mL), satd. ΝaHCO, (50 mL), and satd. ΝaCl (2 x 50 mL). The organic layer was dried over
MgS04, filtered and concentrated to yield a colorless oil (0.63 g, 91 %). The crude product was filtered by silica gel chromatography (50% EtOAc/Hexanes, Rf = 0.42) to afford N-(benzisothiazolone)-L-glycyl-L- phenylalanine benzyl ester as a colorless oil (0.25 g, 36%) which was then hydrogenated with 10% Pd on C in THF and the mixture was shaken under
50 psi H2. The mixture was filtered through celite and evaporated to provide the title compound as a white solid (42 mg, 52%), mp = 201-204°C.
ΝMR data was as follows: Η ΝMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): δ = 7.80 (m, 4H); 7.01 (m, 5H); 4.43
(t, IH, J = 5.43 Hz); 4.17 (d, 2H, J = 5.43); 2.99 (m, IH); 2.82 (m, IH).
13C ΝMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): δ = 167.94, 160.99, 139.70, 138.87, 137.10, 136.46, 131.11, 129.89, 129.01, 128.21, 126.77, 122.87, 56.57, * 41.57, 39.04.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 398 (M+H), 411 (M+Νa). Example 8
Synthesis of
N-(Saccharin-2-yl)-L- alanyl-L-phenylalanine The title compond was prepared using the procedures described for the preparation of Preparative Example A (48), yielding a white solid, mp =
190-193°C.
NMR data was as follows:
'H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 7.86 & 6.95 (m, 9H); 4.66(bs, 2H); 3.18 (m,lH); 2.97 (m, IH); 1.69 (d, 3H, J = 6.59).
13C NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 176.31, 169.18, 158.14, 138.01, 136.68, 135.86, 129.77, 128.81, 127.27, 127.21, 126.13, 121.68, 112.01, 66.48, 54.99, 51.80, 37.53, 14.65.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 403 (M+H), 425 (M+Na).
Example 9
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-
D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was prepared from phenylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1.
Ν-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine-OH and L-Phe-OBnHCl were treated with BOP and NMM in DMF, to give after aqueous workup and flash chromatography, N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine-L-Phe-OBn.
This product was treated with 10% Pd on C in THF, and the mixture was shaken under 50 psi H2. The mixture was filtered through Celite, and evaporated to give the title compound as a solid, mp = 150-152°C. NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (DMSO-d6, 300 MHz): δ = 2.30 (s, 3H), 2.70-2.95 (m,
2H), 4.13-4.30 (m, IH), 5.03-5.20 (m, IH), 6.88-7.34 (m, 12H), 7.55 (m, 2H), 8.38-8.67 (m, 2H). ,3C NMR (DMSO-de, 75 MHz): δ = 21.3, 37.3, 53.7, 59.6, 126.7, 126.8, 126.87, 126.92, 127.4, 127.6, 128.2, 128.26, 128.35, 128.6, 129.4, 129.5, 137.2, 137.9, 138.8, 142.5, 169.0, 172.8.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 453 (M+H).
Example 10
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L- phenylalanyl-D , L-phenylalanine
N-Methyl-L-pheny lalanine (500 mg, 2.79 mmol) was dissolved in IN ΝaOH (6 mL). Dioxane (9 mL)) was added, followed by -toluenesulfonyl chloride (532 mg, 2.79 mmol) and the mixture was vigorously stirred for 1 hr. The volatiles were removed in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in water (30 mL) and washed with Et20 (2 x 30 mL) before making acidic with IN HCl. The mixture was extracted with CHCI3 (3 x 30 mL) and the extracts were evaporated in vacuo to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N- methylpheny lalanine as a solid (424 mg, 45%).
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methylphenylalanine was coupled to L- phenylalanine ethyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 (400 mg, 62%). The title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the ethyl ester using ΝaOH in ethanol. Proton and carbon ΝMR analyis indicated a mixture of diastereomers.
ΝMR data was as follows: Η ΝMR (CDCI3): δ = 9.15 (bs, IH), 7.38-6.89 (14H), 4.82 (m, IH),
4.70 (m, IH), 3.31-2.95 (3H), 2.81 (s, 1/2 X 3H), 2.55 (s, 1/2 X 3H), 2.50 (m, IH), 2.37 (s, 1/2 X 3H), 2.35 (s, 1/2 X 3H).
13C ΝMR (CDCI3): δ = 175.3, 169.6, 169.5, 143.5, 143.4, 137.0, 136.9, 135.6, 135.5, 135.3, 135.2, 129.8, 129.7, 129.6, 129.3, 129.2, 129.1, 129.0, 128.7, 128.6, 128.5, 128.4, 127.2, 127.1, 127.0, 126.6, 126.4, 124.8, 61.2, 61.0, 53.5, 53.4, 37.4, 37.1, 33.9, 33.5, 29.9, 29.6, 21.4.
Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 481 (M+H).
Example 11
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L- diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine Boc-L-Dipheny lalanine was coupled to L-phenylalanine benzyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3. The Boc group was removed by treatment with TFA and anisole, and the mixture was evaporated. The residue was dissolved in Et20 and washed with sat. NaHC03 and sat. NaCl. The Et20 layers were dried with MgS04, filtered, and evaporated to give the deprotected dipeptide. The resulting ester of the title compound was tosylated using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared using the procedure described in Method 7 as a solid, mp = 228-230°C.
NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): δ = 2.11 (s, 3H), 2.37-2.46 (m, 2H),
3.78 (m, IH), 3.99 (d, IH, J = 10.8 Hz), 4.49 (d, IH, J = 10.8 Hz), 6.86-7.04 (m, 17H), 7.36 (d, 2H, J = 8.3 Hz).
13C NMR (CD3OD, 75 MHz): δ = 22.0, 39.8, 56.1, 56.3, 61.6, 128.09, 128.14, 128.4, 128.7, 128.8, 129.8, 129.9, 130.0, 130.1, 130.3, 131.07, 131.11, 138.7, 140.0, 142.2, 142.4, 144.9, 172.3, 174.5.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 549 (M+ Li). Example 12
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-
L-(N-benzyl)histidine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was prepared from sarcosine using the procedure described in Method 1. Coupling was conducted using the procedure described in Method 3. The title compound, prepared by hydrolysis of the ester using the procedure described in Method 7, was obtained as a solid, mp = >200°C (dec).
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (D20, 300 MHz): δ = 2.17 (s, 3H), 2.28 (s, 3H), 2.71-3.05 (m, 2H), 3.31-3.48 (dd, 2H), 4.34 (m, IH), 6.74 (s, IH), 6.97-7.16 (m, 7H), 7.37 (d, 2H, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.44 (s, IH). 13C ΝMR (D20, 75 MHz): δ = 27.7, 37.2, 43.0, 57.3, 59.8, 61.7,
124.7, 134.3, 134.6, 134.9, 135.8, 137.0, 138.9, 143.7, 144.2, 144.3, 152.0, 176.0, 184.6.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 493 (M+H).
Example 13
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L- β-(3-pyridyl)alanine
Sodium metal (1.40 g, 61 mmol) was dissolved in EtOH (100 mL) containing diethyl acetamidomalonate (6.62 g, 30.5 mmol) and 3-picolyl chloride hydrochloride (5.00 g, 30.5 mmol) were added. The mixture was heated to reflux for 6 hr, and then cooled and filtered to remove ΝaCl (washed with EtOH). The solvent was removed in vacuo and the mixture was taken up into saturated aqueous ΝaHC03 (100 mL) and extracted with
EtOAc (3 x 100 mL). The solvent was removed and the residue purified by silica gel flash chromatography (95:5 CH2Cl2/MeOH) to give diethyl 2- (3-pyridylmethyl)-2-acetamidomalonate (2.84 g, 30%).
Diethyl 2-(3-pyridylmethyl)-2-acetamidomalonate was dissolved in 6N HCl (30 mL) and heated to reflux for 19 hr whereupon it was cooled to room temperature and the HCl solution was removed by evaporation in vacuo. The intermediate amino acid dihydrochloride salt was taken up into MeOH (30 mL) saturated with HCl gas and stirred for 3.5 hr. The MeOH/HCl was removed by evaporation in vacuo to give β-(3- pyridyl)alanine methyl ester dihydrochloride (2.235 g, 100%).
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to 3-(3-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester dihydrochloride using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-β-(3-pyridyl)alanine (166 mg, 17%). The title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using
IN aqueous ΝaOH in dioxane/ water (129 mg, 100%). ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (DMSO-dβ): δ = 8.30 (m, 2H), 7.66 (d, 2H, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.63 (m, IH), 7.51 (m, IH), 7.42 (d, 2H, J = 7.9 Hz), 7.20 (m, IH), 4.07 (m, IH), 3.56 (s, 2H), 3.11 (dd, IH, J = 4.8, 13.2 Hz), 2,96 (dd, IH, /
= 5.5, 13.4 Hz), 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H).
13C ΝMR (DMSO-c ): δ = 172.7, 166.0, 150.8, 147.3, 143.8, 137.3, 134.8, 134.0, 130.2, 127.7, 123.3, 55.3, 53.2, 36.2, 34.9, 21.4. Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 392 (M+H). " Example 14
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-
D,L-β-(4-pyridyl)alanine
The title compound was prepared as described in Example 13 (107) except 4-picolylchloride hydrochloride is used in place of 3-picolylchloride hydrochloride.
NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CD3OD): δ = 8.39 (d, 2H, J = 5.3 Hz),7.68 (d, 2H, J =
8.2 Hz), 7.41 (d, 2H, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.34 (d, 2H, J = 5.8 Hz), 4.58 (m,
IH), 3.70 (d, IH, J = 16.6 Hz), 3.54 (d, IH, J = 16.5 Hz), 3.30 (dd, IH,
J = 4.9, 13.7 Hz), 3.07 (dd, 2H, J = 7.6, 13.7 Hz), 2.66 (s, 3H), 2.43 (s,
3H). 13C NMR (CD3OD): δ = 176.0, 270.2, 150.8, 150.1, 146.1, 135.7,
131.5, 129.3, 127.4, 56.4, 54.8, 39.1, 37.6, 22.1. Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 392 (M+H).
Example 15 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L- β-(2-pyridyl)alanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to L-β-(2-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester dihydrochloride using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-β-(2-pyridyl)alanine methyl ester. The title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using IN aqueous ΝaOH in dioxane/ water. ΝMR data was as follows: Η ΝMR (DMSO-ck): δ = 8.38 (m. 1H),7.72 (d, IH, J = 7.4 Hz),
7.65 (d, 2H, J = 8.2 Hz), 7.59 (m, IH), 7.41 (d, 2H, J = 8.2 Hz), 7.21 (d, IH, / = 7.8 Hz), 7.12 (m IH), 4.23 (m, IH), 3.50 (m, 2H), 3.23 (dd, 1H, J = 4.8, 13.4 Hz), 3.01 (dd, 2H, J = 7.1, 13.4 Hz), 2.53 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H).
13C NMR (DMSO-c ): δ = 173.4, 165.7, 159.7, 148.9, 243.8, 136.1,
134.0, 130.2, 127.7, 124.0, 121.4, 54.7, 53.3, 36.1, 21.4. Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 414 (M+Na).
Example 16
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)- D,L-phenylsarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylsarcosine was prepared from phenylsarcosine using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared using the procedure described for Example 9 (65) as a solid, mp = 78-82 °C.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 2.97- 3.34 (m, 2H), 4.89 (m, IH), 5.63 (s, IH), 6.77-6.92 (m, 3H), 7.13-7.35 (m, 10H), 7.66 (d, 2H, / = 7.5 Hz). 13C ΝMR (CDC13, 75 MHz): δ = 22.2, 32.3, 38.0, 53.9, 64.4, 127.8,
128.1, 129.1, 129.4, 129.88, 129.95, 130.0, 130.3, 133.9, 136.2, 136.4, 144.4, 169.8, 175.2.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 467 (M+H).
Preparative Example B
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-
N-methyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to N-methyl-L- phenylalanine methyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-N-methylphenylalanine methyl ester. The title compound was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using LiOH in THF/water. Proton and carbon NMR analysis indicated a mixture of amide bond rotomers in about a 65:35 ratio.
NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CDC13): δ = 7.59 (d, 0.65 x 2H, J = 7.4 Hz), 7.54 (d,
0.35 x 2H, J = 7.3 Hz), 7.34-7.18 (7H), 5.25 (m, 0.65H), 5.09 (m, 0.35H), 3.93 (d, 0.65H, / = 14.6 Hz), 3.58 (d, 0.65H, J = 14.6 H), 3.41 (m, IH), 3.10 (m, IH), 2.97 (s, 0.65 x 3H), 2.92 (s, 0.35 x 3H), 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.39 (s, 0.65 x 3H), 2.38 (s, 0.35 x 3H). 13C NMR (CDCI3): δ = 173.3, 168.1, 167.8, 143.9, 143.8, 136.9,
136.8, 133.3, 129.7, 129.1, 128.8, 128.7, 128.6, 127.5, 127.0, 126.8, 59.0, 52.8, 52.7, 35.0, 34.7, 34.2, 33.0, 30.1, 21.5.
Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 405 (M+H).
Example 17
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine
Cbz-4-(l,l-dimethylethyl)aspartic acid was coupled with phenylalanine t-butyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3. The Cbz group was removed using the procedure described in Method 4. The resulting ester was tosylated using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared using the procedure outlined in Method 11. NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CD3OD, 300 MHz): 6 = 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.18-2.39 (m, 2H),
2.68-2.89 (m, 2H), 3.97 (t, IH, / = 5.2 Hz), 4.22 (t, IH, J = 4.9 Hz), 6.97-7.12 (m, 7H), 7.45 (d, 2H, J = 8.2 Hz).
13C NMR (CD3OD), 75 MHz): δ = 22.1, 38.6, 38.9, 55.1, 55.9, 128.5, 128.8, 130.1, 130.9, 131.0, 131.3, 138.3, 138.6, 139.4, 145.5, 172.6.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 435 (M+H). Example 18
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin- 3-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-3-carbonyl) (1 eq) was dissolved in DMF, with Et3Ν (2.0 eq), BOP (1.1 eq), and L-phenylalanine benzyl ester HCl salt (1.1 eq). The benzyl ester was isolated as an oil.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.62 (d, 2H, J = 8.16 Hz), 7.33 (m, 5H), 7.23-7.08 (m, 8H), 6.70 (d, 2H, J = 8.16 Hz), 5.10 (q, 2H, J = 11.50 Hz), 4.72 (m, IH), 4.52 (m, IH), 4.18 (m, 2H), 3.07 (m, 2H), 2.85 (m, 2H), 2.52 (m, IH), 2.34 (s, 3H).
Example 19
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)- L-phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
The procedure used for the preparation of Example 18 (173) was utilized. The title compound was isolated as an oil.
NMR data was as follows: !H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.66 (d, IH, J = 7.98 Hz), 7.42-
6.92 (m, 16H), 6.66 (d, 2H, J = 8.50 Hz), 5.17 (q, 2H, J = 10.08 Hz), 4.83 (m, IH), 4,58 (m, IH), 3.07 (m, 3H), 2.62 (m, IH), 2.32 (s, 3H). Example 20
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-
L-phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
To N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanine (2.0 mmoles) in DMF (10 mL) was added BOP (2.1 mmoles) and N-methylmoφholine (4.0 mmoles) and the reaction stirred at room temperature for 45 minutes. L-Pheny lalanine benzyl ester (2.0 mmoles) was added and the reaction stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction mixture was extracted with water (100 mL) and diethyl ether (3 x 50 mL) The combined organic layers were successively washed with 0.2 Ν HCl (2 x 50 mL), sat. ΝaHCOj (50 mL), and sat. ΝaCl (50 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgS04, filtered, and concentrated to yield a colorless oil (387 mg, 40%). The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (50% EtOAc /Hexane, Rf =
0.61). The title compound was crystalized from CHC13/Hexane to yield a white solid, mp = 109-110°C. ΝMR data was as follows: Η ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 7.75 (d, 2H, J = 8.24 Hz); 7.26 (m, 13H); 5.88 (d, IH, J = 7.69 Hz); 5.11 (q, 2H, J = 12.1 Hz); 4.76 (q,
IH, J = 7.69 Hz); 3.85 (m, IH); 3.00 (d, 2H, J = 5.98 Hz); 2.37 (s, 3H); 1.19 (d, 3H, J = 7.09 Hz).
13C ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 171.83, 171.49, 144.30, 137.34, 136.12, 135.53, 130.36, 130.00, 129.90, 129.19, 129.12, 127.85, 127.71, 127.65, 67.92, 54.07, 52.94, 38.26, 22.13, 19.96.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 481 (M+H). Example 21
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-
L-phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
The title compound was prepared according to Method 3, and the crude product was crystallized from Et20/hexane to afford a white solid, mp = 80-82°C.
NMR data was as follows: Η NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 7.64 (d, 2H, J = 8.24 Hz); 7.26
(m, 13H); 5.16 (q, 2H, J = 12.1 Hz); 4.92 (d of t, IH, J = 6.71 & 11.29 Hz); 3.7.70 (d, IH, J = 16.48 Hz); 3.43 (d, IH, J = 16.48 Hz); 3.15 (m, 2H); 2.56 (s, 3H); 2.44 (s, 3H).
13C NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ = 171.34, 167.88, 144.88, 135.97, 135.60, 133.61, 130.56, 129.85, 129.36, 129.22, 129.15, 128.16, 127.84,
67.93, 54.51, 53.51, 38.29, 37.15, 22.16.
Mass Spectroscopy: (+FAB) 481 (M+H).
Example 22 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L- phenylalanine Ethyl Ester
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was prepared from phenylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared using the procedure described for Example 11 (86) as a solid, mp = 145-147°C.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ = 1.12-1.29 (m, 3H), 2.38 (s, 3H), 2.91-3.05 (m, 2H), 4.04-4.20 (m, 2H), 4.65-4.81 (m, 2H), 5.85-5.95 (m,
IH), 6.07-6.21 (m, IH), 6.65 (m, IH), 6.95 (m, IH), 7.02-7.33 (m, 10H), 7.60 (m, 2H). 13C NMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = (diastereomeric pairs separated by slashed line) 14.57/14.70, 22.09/22.10, 38.1, 53.7/54.2, 61.00/61.06, 62.26/62.34, 127.61/127.76, 127.81/127.88, 128.06/128.16, 129.06/129.16, 129.3, 129.6, 129.69/129.76, 130.06/130.08, 135.4, 136.01/136.55, 136.94/137.21, 144.03/144.13, 168.67/169.00,
171.07/171.22.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 481 (M+H).
Example 23 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)- seryl-L-phenylalanine Ethyl Ester
L-((9-Benzyl)-serine methyl ester hydrochloride salt (6.28 g, 25.5 mmol) was dissolved in dichloromethane (50 mL) with tosyl chloride (1.1 eq, 5.36 g) and Et3N (2.2 eq, 7.48 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. EtOAc was added as well as brine, and the organic layer dried over MgS04. The desired N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-(<9-benzyl)-serine methyl ester was isolated as an oil, in 100% yield (10.04 g, 25.5 mmol).
This was then taken up in dry acetone (50 mL) with iodomethane (1.1 eq, 1.88 mL) and K2C03 (1.1 eq, 4.10 g). The solution was refluxed overnight. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS04. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The desired N-methyl derivative was isolated as a clear oil in 40% yield (4.16 g, 11 mmol). The ester was dissolved in a 1:1 solution of dioxane:H20 with ΝaOH (1.1 eq, 50 mL). The desired compound was isolated as a solid. N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(O-benzyl)serine (754 mg, 2.07 mmol) was dissolved in 30 mL of dry DMF with phenylalanine ethyl ester hydrochloride salt (1.1 eq, 525 mg), Et3Ν (2.2 eq, 636 mL) and BOP reagent (1.1 eq, 1.00 g). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 12 hours. EtOAc was added. The organic layer was washed with NaHC03 saturated, 10% citric acid, and brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS04. Upon evaporation of the solvents under reduced pressure, the crude material was eluted on column chromatography (Silica gel; CHCl3/MeOH 9:1). The title ester was isolated as an oil in 60% yield (664 mg, 1.23 mmol) and as a mixture of diastereoisomers.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.69 (d, 2H, J = 8.22 Hz), 7.27 (m, 5H), 7.15 (m, 5H), 7.04 (m, 2H), 4.80 (m, 2H), 4.29 (m, 4H), 3.76 (m, IH), 3.58 (m, IH), 3.19 (m, 2H), 2.71 (s, 1.5 H), 2.57 (s, 1.5H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 1.27 (m, 3H).
13C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13): δ = 171.50, 168.70, 143.98. 137.84, 136.44, 136.18, 129.93, 128.98, 128.45, 128.37, 128.25, 127.65, 73.75, 67.15, 66.99, 62.17, 60.35, 59.98, 53.93, 53.75, 38.34, 30.95, 22.15, 14.69. Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB) 539 (M+H).
Example 24
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L- seryl-L-phenylalanine Ethyl Ester
Example 23 (191) (664 mg, 1.23 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) with a catalytic amount of Pearlman's catalyst. The hydrogenation reaction was run for 2 hours at 5 psi. The solution was filtered over celite. Upon evaporation of the solvent under reduced pressure, an oil was isolated as the title compound in quantitative yields. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ = 7.68 (m, 2H), 7.30 (m, 7H), 4.77 (m, IH), 4.46 (m, IH), 4.18 (m, 2H), 3.65 (m, IH), 3.47 (m, 2H), 3.07 (m, 2H), 2.78 (s, 1.5H), 2.54 (s, 1.5H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 1.25 (m, 3H). 1 C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13): δ = 171.47, 170.31, 144.78, 136.42,
135.77, 130.67, 129.88, 129.33, 127.92, 127.80, 62.44, 60.99, 60.81, 54.00, 53.77, 38.32, 32.19, 31.96, 22.24, 14.76.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB) 449 (M+H).
Example 25
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L- phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
Boc-L-diphenylalanine was coupled to L-phenylalanine benzyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3. The Boc group was removed using the procedure described in Example 11 (86). The resulting ester was tosylated using the procedure described in Method 1 yielding the title compound as a solid, mp = 79-84°C. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.36 (s, 3H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 4.25- 4.39 (m, 2H), 4.95 (d, 2H, J = 4.9 Hz), 5.19 (d, IH, J = 8.0 Hz), 6.18 (d, IH, J = 7.8 Hz), 6.92 (m, 2H), 7.08-7.38 (m, 20H), 7.55 (d, 2H, J = 8.4 Hz). 13C NMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = 22.1, 38.8, 54.1, 54.7, 60.9, 67.7,
127.6, 127.70, 127.72, 128.0, 128.7, 129.10, 129.14, 129.3, 129.9, 130.2, 135.5, 136.0, 137.0, 139.4, 140.1, 144.2, 169.9, 170.8. Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 633 (M+H). Example 26
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D,L- phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine Ethyl Ester
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine was esterified with thionyl chloride in methanol to give N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)phenylglycine methyl ester. This was then taken up in dry acetone (50 mL) with iodomethane
(1.1 eq, 1.88 mL) and K2C03 (1.1 eq, 4.10 g). The solution was refluxed overnight. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with brine. The organic layer was dried over MgS04. The solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The resulting ester was hydrolyzed using the procedure described in Method 6 to yield N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl- phenylglycine, which was coupled with L-phenylalanine ethyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 to yield the title compound. ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 1.27 (t, 3H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 2.98-3.25 (m, 2H), 4.21 (q, 2H), 4.80-4.91 (m, IH), 5.68 (s, IH), 6.59 (br d, minor dia., IH with 6.73) 6.73 (br d, major dia., IH with
6.59), 6.92-7.02 (m, 2H), 7.11-7.43 (m, 10H), 7.69 (d, 2H).
13C ΝMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = (Major diastereomer) 14.75, 22.16, 32.20, 38.38, 53.56, 62.21, 64.43, 127.79, 128.07, 129.07, 129.13, 129.27, 129.87, 129.92, 130.04, 134.18, 136.10, 136.32, 144.22, 169.08, 171.71; (Minor diastereomer) 14.68, 22.16, 32.12, 38.51, 53.97, 62.21,
64.22, 127.76, 128.16, 129.07, 129.13, 129.32, 129.87, 129.92, 130.26, 134.26, 136.10, 136.52, 144.26, 169.08, 171.71. Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 495 (M+H). Example 27
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-
(N-benzyl)histidine Methyl Ester
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine methyl ester was prepared from sarcosine methyl ester using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared by coupling in DMF Ν-(toluene-4- sulfonyl)sarcosine with (N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester in the presence of BOP and ΝMM, to give after aqueous workup and flash chromatography, the title compound.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.44 (s, 3H), 2.76 (s, 3H), 3.09 (m,
2H), 3.44 (d, IH, J = 16.4 Hz), 3.68 (s, 3H), 3.83 (d, IH, J = 16.5 Hz), 4.80 (m, IH), 5.07 (s, 2H), 6.74 (s, IH), 7.14 (d, 2H, J = 6.0 Hz), 7.33
(m, 5H), 7.50 (s, IH), 7.68 (d, 2H, J = 8.3 Hz), 8.06 (br d, IH, 8.1 Hz).
13C ΝMR (CDC13, 75 MHz): δ = 14.8, 22.1, 30.2, 37.1, 51.4, 52.6,
52.9, 54.4, 61.0, 117.8, 128.0, 128.2, 128.8, 129.6, 130.5, 134.0, 136.6,
137.8, 137.9, 144.6, 168.2, 172.1. Mass Spectroscopy : (FAB + ) 485 (M + H) .
Example 28
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L- (N-benzyl)histidine Methyl Ester
N-Methyl-N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-serine (420 mg, 1.53 mmol) was dissolved in dry DMF (20 mL) at ice bath temperature. L-(N- benzyl)histidine methyl ester hydrochloride salt (1.1 eq, 500 mg) was added as well as Et3Ν (2.2 eq, 471 mL), with HOBT (1.1 eq, 229 mg).
After 15 mn, EDCI (1.1 eq, 502 mg) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. EtOAc was added and the organic layer washed with NaHC03 saturated, 10% citric acid and brine (3x50 mL). The organic layer was dried over MgS04, and the solvent evaporated under reduced pressure. The crude material was eluted on column chromatography (silica gel), with EtOAc/hexanes 1:3, then with CHCl3:MeOH 9:1. The title compound was isolated as an oil in 30% yield
(230 mg, 0.447 mmol).
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (300 MHz, CDC13 ): δ = 7.91 (d, IH, J = 7.50 Hz), 7.73 (d, 2H, J = 8.31 Hz), 7.46 (s, IH), 7.32 (m, 5H), 7.15 (m, 2H), 6.69 (s, IH), 5.04 (s, 2H), 4.74 (m, IH), 4.46 (m, IH), 3.71 (m, 2H), 3.66 (s,
3H), 3.06 (m, 2H), 2.80 (s, 3H), 2.40 (s, 3H).
13C NMR (75 MHz, CDC13): δ = 171.98, 170.40, 144.41, 137.93, 136.54, 135.976, 130.41, 129.57, 128.88, 128.01, 117.74, 61.42, 61.15, 53.07, 51.46, 32.29, 30.09, 22.13 (IC missing). Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB) 515 (M+H).
Example 29
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L- phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
The title compound was prepared by coupling N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)- D,L-phenylglycine to L-phenylalanine benzyl ester using the procedure described in Method 3 to provide a solid, mp = 148-150°C.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η ΝMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.37 (s, 3H), 2.91-3.07 (m, 2H), 4.70-4.85 (m, 2H), 5.04 (dd, 2H), 5.94 (br d, IH), 6.23 (br d, IH), 6.84 (d, 2H), 7.00-7.40 (m, 15H), 7.60 (d, 2H). 13C NMR (CDC13, 75 MHz): δ = 22.1, 38.1, 54.2, 61.1, 67.9, 127.7,
127.8, 127.9, 128.1, 128.2, 129.1, 129.4, 129.6, 129.7, 129.8, 130.0,
135.4, 135.8, 136.5, 137.2, 144.1, 169.1, 170.9.
Mass Spectroscopy : (FAB + ) 543 (M + H) .
Example 30
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D,L- phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine Benzyl Ester
The title compound was prepared following the procedure described in
Example 26 (198) as a solid, mp = 46-49°C.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.54, (s, 3H), 2.96- 3.22 (m, 2H), 4.90 (q, IH, J = 3.0 Hz), 5.15 (dd, 2H), 5.65 (s, IH), 6.51
(d, IH, J = 6.9 Hz), 6.95 (d, 2H, J = 6.2 Hz), 7.04 (m, 2H), 7.15-7.40 (m, 13H), 7.67 (d, 2H, J = 8.2 Hz).
13C NMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = 22.2, 32.1, 38.4, 53.9, 64.3, 68.0, 127.8, 128.1, 129.1, 129.2, 129.3, 129.4, 129.8, 129.9, 130.0, 130.1, 130.2, 134.2, 135.6, 136.2, 136.5, 144.2, 169.1, 171.4.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 557 (M+H).
Example 31
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)- glycyl-L-phenylalanine Methyl Ester
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-2-thienylethylamine was prepared using the procedure described in Method 1. This compound was reacted with t-butyl bromoacetate yielding N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycine t- butyl ester (following the method of Zuckermann, Kerr, Kent, and Moos J. Am. Chem. Soc. 1992, 114, 10646-10647). The ester was hydrolyzed using the procedure described in Method 17. The title compound was prepared following the procedure described in Method 13. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ = 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.85 (m, 2H), 3.05- 3.22 (m, 3H), 3.40 (m, IH), 3.69 (dd, 2H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 4.83 (m, IH),
6.73 (d, IH, J = 2.3 Hz), 6.90 (t, IH, J = 2.4 Hz), 6.98 (br d, IH, J = 6.2 Hz), 7.13 (d, IH, J = 3.2 Hz), 7.17-7.35 (m, 7H), 7.66 (d, 2H, J = 8.0 Hz).
Example 32
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)- glycyl-L-phenylalanine The title compound was prepared from the product of Example 31
(289) using the procedure described in Method 7 to provide a solid, mp = >200°C.
Example 33 Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L- (N-benzyl)histidine Methyl Ester
The title compound was prepared according to procedures described in Example 31 (289).
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ = 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.82 (m, 2H), 3.02- 3.30 (m, 3H), 3.46 (m, IH), 3.67 (s, 3H), 3.75 (dd, 2H), 4.79 (m, IH), 5.00 (s, 2H), 6.77 (s, IH), 7.10-7.35 (m, 12H), 7.48 (s, IH), 7.69 (d, 2H, J = 7.3 Hz), 7.97 (br d, IH, J = 6.9 Hz). 13C NMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = 22.1, 30.2, 35.3, 51.4, 52.6, 52.7, 52.9, 118.1, 127.2, 127.9, 128.0, 128.8, 129.2, 129.4, 129.5, 130.5, 135.7, 136.6, 137.6, 137.8, 138.5, 144.6, 168.9, 172.0.
Mass Spectroscopy: (FAB+) 575 (M+H); 597 (M+Na+).
Example 34
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-
(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
The title compound was prepared according to procedures described in Examples 31 (289) and 32 (290). NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ = 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.56 (m, 2H), 3.03- 3.37 (m, 4H), 3.72 (dd, 2H), 4.84 (q, IH, J = 3.4 Hz), 7.02 (d, 2H, J =
6.1 Hz), 7.12-7.34 (m, 10H), 7.63 (d, 2H, J = 8.3 Hz), 8.78 (br s, IH). 13C NMR (CDCI3, 75 MHz): δ = 22.1, 35.1, 37.8, 52.6, 52.7, 53.8, 127.3, 127.9, 128.0, 129.2, 129.3, 129.4, 130.0, 130.6, 135.2, 136.0, 138.1, 144.9, 169.9, 175.0. Mass Spectroscopy : (FAB + ) 481 (M + H) .
Example 35
Synthesis of N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl- D,L-4-cyanophenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosine was coupled to 4-cyanophenylalanine methyl ester hydrochloride (prepared via the method of Wagner, Voight, and Vieweg Pharmazie 1984, 39, 226-230) to give N-(toluene-4- sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-cyanophenylalanine methyl ester. The compond was prepared via hydrolysis of the methyl ester using 0.5 Ν ΝaOH in THF/water. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CD3OD/CDCI3): δ = 7.69 (m, 3H), 7.41 (m, 3H), 4.79 (m, IH), 3.77 (d, IH, J = 16.7 Hz), 3.55 (d, IH, J = 16.5 Hz), 3.32 (dd, IH, J = 4.9, 14.0 Hz), 3.13 (dd, IH, J = 8.8, 14.0 Hz), 2.67 (s, 3H), 2.45 (s, 3H).
13C NMR (CD3OD/CDCI3): δ = 174.0, 170.6, 146.2, 144.9, 135.5, 134.0, 132.2, 131.6, 129.3, 120.4, 112.3, 54.8, 50.4, 39.0, 37.7, 22.4.
Mass Spectroscopy: FAB m/e 416 (M+H).
Example 36
Synthesis of
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyI)-L- rt-butylglycyl-
L-phenylalanine
N-(Toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-tert-butylglycine was prepared from L-tert- butylglycine using the procedure described in Method 1. The title compound was prepared by coupling in DMF Ν-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L~ tert-butylglycine with an L-phenylalanine ester in the presence of BOP and NMM. Conventional deesterification provided the title compound. NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (CDCI3): δ 7.7 (d, 2H), 7.25 (m, 5H), 7.0 (m, 2H), 5.93 (d, IH), 5.57 (d, IH), 4.6 (m, IH), 3.3 (d, IH), 3.0-2.7 (d of d, 2H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 0.87 (s, 9H).
Example 37
Synthesis of
N-(Saccharin-2-yl)-D,L-alaninyl-
L-4-(isonicotinamido)phenylalanine Methyl Ester
The title compound was prepared following the procedures described in Preparative Example A. N-(saccharin-2-yl)-D,L-alaninyl-L-p-amino- phenylalanine methyl ester (1 eq) was dissolved in dichloromethane with Et3N (1.1 eq) and reacted with isonicotinoyl chloride (1.1 eq, 860 mL) to provide the title compound.
NMR data was as follows:
Η NMR (DMSO-d6,400 MHz) (1:1 mixture of diastereomers): δ = 10.43 (d, IH); 8.80 (m, 2H); 8.45 and 8.25 (two m, IH), 8.23 (m, IH);
8.04 (m, 3H); 7.82 (m, 2H); 7.65 (m, 2H); 7.20 (m, 2H); 4.76 (m, IH); 4.45 (m, IH); 3.40 and 3.42 (two s, 3H); 3.00 (m, 2H), 1.65 and 1.70 (two s, 3H).
Other compounds prepared by the methods described above include those set forth in Table II below:
R3 O
R1-SO2-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-R6
H R5
Figure imgf000139_0001
ϋo 1
Figure imgf000140_0001
Example 46
In vitro Assay For Determining Binding of Candidate Compounds to VLA-4
An in vitro assay was used to assess binding of candidate compounds to 4β! integrin. Compounds which bind in this assay can be used to assess VCAM-1 levels in biological samples by conventional assays (e.g., competitive binding assays). This assay is sensitive to I o values as low as about InM.
The activity of α βj integrin was measured by the interaction of soluble VCAM-1 with Jurkat cells (e.g., American Type Culture Collection Nos. TIB 152, TIB 153, and CRL 8163), a human T-cell line which expresses high levels of α4βt integrin. VCAM-1 interacts with the cell surface in an α4βι integrin-dependent fashion (Yednock, et al. J. Biol. Chem., 1995,
270:28740).
Recombinant soluble VCAM-1 was expressed as a chimeric fusion protein containing the seven extracellular domains of VCAM-1 on the N- terminus and the human IgG! heavy chain constant region on the C- terminus. The VCAM-1 fusion protein was made and purified by the manner described by Yednock, supra.
Jurkat cells were grown in RPMI 1640 supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, penicillin, streptomycin and glutamine as described by
Yednock, supra.
Jurkat cells were incubated with 1.5 mM MnCl2 and 5 μg/mL 15/7 antibody for 30 minutes on ice. Mn+2 activates the receptor to enhance ligand binding, and 15/7 is a monoclonal antibody that recognizes an activated/ligand occupied conformation of α4βt integrin and locks the molecule into this conformation thereby stabilizing the VCAM-1 /oc^ integrin interaction. Yednock, et al., supra. Antibodies similar to the 15/7 antibody have been prepared by other investigators (Luque, et al, 1996, J. Biol. Chem. 27-1: 11067) and may be used in this assay.
Cells were then incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature with candidate compounds, in various concentrations ranging from 66 μM to 0.01 μM using a standard 5 -point serial dilution. 15 L soluble recombinant VCAM-1 fusion protein was then added to Jurkat cells and incubated for 30 minutes on ice. (Yednock et al., supra.).
Cells were then washed two times and resuspended in PE-conjugated goat F(ab')2 anti-mouse IgG Fc (Immunotech, Westbrook, ME) at 1:200 and incubated on ice, in the dark, for 30 minutes. Cells were washed twice and analyzed with a standard fluorescence activated cell sorter ("FACS") analysis as described in Yednock, et al., supra.
Compounds having an IC50 of less than about 15μM possess binding affinity to α4β1.
When tested in this assay, each of the compounds in Examples 1-45 has an IC50 of 15 μM or less.
Example 47
In vitro Saturation Assay For Determining Binding of Candidate Compounds to α4βx
The following describes an in vitro assay to determine the plasma levels needed for a compound to be active in the Experimental Autoimmune Encephalomyelitis ("EAE") model, described in the next example, or in other in vivo models.
Log-growth Jurkat cells are washed and resuspended in normal animal plasma containing 20 μg/ml of the 15/7 antibody (described in the above example).
The Jurkat cells are diluted two-fold into either normal plasma samples containing known candidate compound amounts in various concentrations ranging from 66 μM to 0.01 μM, using a standard 12 point serial dilution for a standard curve, or into plasma samples obtained from the peripheral blood of candidate compound-treated animals.
Cells are then incubated for 30 minutes at room temperature, washed twice with phosphate-buffered saline ("PBS") containing 2% fetal bovine serum and ImM each of calcium chloride and magnesium chloride (assay medium) to remove unbound 15/7 antibody.
The cells are then exposed to phycoerythrin-conjugated goat F(ab')2 anti-mouse IgG Fc (Immunotech, Westbrook, ME), which has been adsorbed for any non-specific cross-reactivity by co-incubation with 5 % serum from the animal species being studied, at 1:200 and incubated in the dark at 4°C for 30 minutes.
Cells are washed twice with assay medium and resuspended in the same. They are then analyzed with a standard fluorescence activated cell sorter ("FACS") analysis as described in Yednock et al. J. Biol. Chem., 1995, 270:28740. The data is then graphed as fluorescence versus dose, e.g., in a normal dose-response fashion. The dose levels that result in the upper plateau of the curve represent the levels needed to obtain efficacy in an in vivo model.
This assay may also be used to determine the plasma levels needed to saturate the binding sites of other integrins, such as the α^ integrin, which is the integrin most closely related α4βι (Palmer et al, 1993, J. Cell Bio., 123: 1289). Such binding is predictive of in vivo utility for inflammatory conditions mediated by Ogβj integrin, including by way of example, airway hyper-responsiveness and occlusion that occurs with chronic asthma, smooth muscle cell proliferation in atherosclerosis, vascular occlusion following angioplasty, fibrosis and glomerular scarring as a result of renal disease, aortic stenosis, hypertrophy of synovial membranes in rheumatoid arthritis, and inflammation and scarring that occur with the progression of ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease.
Accordingly, the above-described assay may be performed with a human colon carcinoma cell line, SW 480 (ATTC #CCL228) transfected with cDNA encoding α9 integrin (Yokosaki et al., 1994, J. Biol. Chem., 269:26691), in place of the Jurkat cells, to measure the binding of the
Figure imgf000144_0001
integrin. As a control, SW 480 cells which express other and subunits may be used.
Accordingly, another aspect of this invention is directed to a method for treating a disease in a mammalian patient, which disease is mediated by α9β1? and which method comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of this invention. Such compounds are preferably administered in a pharmaceutical composition described herein above. Effective daily dosing will depend upon the age, weight, condition of the patient which factors can be readily ascertained by the attending clinician. However, in a preferred embodiment, the compounds are admimstered from about 20 to 500 μg/kg per day. Using a conventional oral formulation, compounds of this invention would be active in this model.
Example 48 In vivo Evaluation
The standard multiple sclerosis model, Experimental Autoimmune (or Allergic) Encephalomyelitis ("EAE"), is used to determine the effect of candidate compounds to reduce motor impairment in rats or guinea pigs. Reduction in motor impairment is based on blocking adhesion between leukocytes and the endothelium and correlates with anti-inflammatory activity in the candidate compound. This model has been previously described by Keszthelyi et al., Neurology, 1996, 47: 1053-1059, and measures the delay of onset of disease.
Brains and spinal cords of adult Hartley guinea pigs are homogenized in an equal volume of phosphate-buffered saline. An equal volume of Freund's complete adjuvant (100 mg mycobacterium tuberculosis plus 10 ml Freund's incomplete adjuvant) is added to the homogenate. The mixture is emulsified by circulating it repeatedly through a 20 ml syringe with a peristaltic pump for about 20 minutes.
Female Lewis rats (2-3 months old, 170-220 g) or Hartley guinea pigs
(20 day old, 180-200 g) are anesthetized with isoflurane and three injections of the emulsion, 0.1 ml each, are made in each flank. Motor impairment onset is seen in approximately 9 days. Candidate compound treatment begins on Day 8, just before onset of symptoms. Compounds are administered subcutaneously ("SC"), orally ("PO") or intraperitoneally ("IP"). Doses are given in a range of lOmg/kg to 200 mg/kg, bid, for five days, with typical dosing of 10 to 100 mg/kg SC, 10 to 50 mg/kg PO, and 10 to 100 mg/kg IP.
Antibody GG5/3 against 4βj integrin (Keszthelyi et al., Neurology, 1996, 47:1053-1059), which delays the onset of symptoms, is used as a positive control and is injected subcutaneously at 3 mg/kg on Day 8 and 11.
Body weight and motor impairment are measured daily. Motor impairment is rated with the following clinical score:
0 no change
1 tail weakness or paralysis
2 hindlimb weakness
3 hindlimb paralysis
4 moribund or dead
A candidate compound is considered active if it delays the onset of symptoms, e.g., produces clinical scores no greater than 2 or slows body weight loss as compared to the control.
Example 49
Asthma Model
Inflammatory conditions mediated by 4βi integrin include, for example, airway hyper-responsiveness and occlusion that occurs with chronic asthma. The following describes an asthma model which can be used to study the in vivo effects of the compounds of this invention for use in treating asthma.
Following the procedures described by Abraham et al, J. Clin. Invest, 93:776-787 (1994) and Abraham et al, Am J. Respir Crit Care Med,
156:696-703 (1997), both of which are incoφorated by reference in their entirety, compounds of this invention are formulated into an aerosol and admimstered to sheep which are hypersensitive to Ascaris suum antigen. Compounds which decrease the early antigen-induced bronchial response and/or block the late-phase airway response, e.g., have a protective effect against antigen-induced late responses and airway hyper-responsiveness ("AHR"), are considered to be active in this model.
Allergic sheep which are shown to develop both early and late bronchial responses to inhaled Ascaris suum antigen are used to study the airway effects of the candidate compounds. Following topical anesthesia of the nasal passages with 2% lidocaine, a balloon catheter is advanced through one nostril into the lower esophagus. The animals are then intubated with a cuffed endotracheal tube through the other nostril with a flexible fiberoptic bronchoscope as a guide.
Pleural pressure is estimated according to Abraham (1994). Aerosols (see formulation below) are generated using a disposable medical nebulizer that provides an aerosol with a mass median aerodynamic diameter of 3.2 μm as determined with an Andersen cascade impactor. The nebulizer is connected to a dosimeter system consisting of a solenoid valve and a source of compressed air (20 psi). The output of the nebulizer is directed into a plastic T-piece, one end of which is connected to the inspiratory port of a piston respirator. The solenoid valve is activated for 1 second at the beginning of the inspiratory cycle of the respirator. Aerosols are delivered at Vτ of 500 ml and a rate of 20 breaths/minute. A 0.5 % sodium bicarbonate solution only is used as a control.
To assess bronchial responsiveness, cumulative concentration-response curves to carbachol can be generated according to Abraham (1994). Bronchial biopsies can be taken prior to and following the initiation of treatment and 24 hours after antigen challenge. Bronchial biopsies can be preformed according to Abraham (1994).
An in vitro adhesion study of alveolar macrophages can be performed according to Abraham (1994), and a percentage of adherent cells is calculated.
Aerosol Formulation
A solution of the candidate compound in 0.5% sodium bicarbonate/saline (w/v) at a concentration of 30.0 mg/mL is prepared using the following procedure:
A. Preparation of 0.5 % Sodium Bicarbonate/Saline Stock Solution: 100.0 mL
Figure imgf000148_0001
Procedure:
1. Add 0.5g sodium bicarbonate into a 100 mL volumetric flask.
2. Add approximately 90.0 mL saline and sonicate until dissolved.
3. Q.S. to 100.0 mL with saline and mix thoroughly. B. Preparation of 30.0 mg/mL Candidate Compound: 10.0 mL
Figure imgf000149_0001
Procedure:
1. Add 0.300 g of the candidate compound into a 10.0 mL volumetric flask.
2. Add approximately 9.7 mL of 0.5% sodium bicarbonate / saline stock solution.
3. Sonicate until the candidate compound is completely dissolved.
4. Q.S. to 10.0 mL with 0.5% sodium bicarbonate / saline stock solution and mix thoroughly.
Using a conventional oral formulation, compounds of this invention would be active in this model.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A compound of formula I:
i R3 O
I II
R,-S02-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-OH I
H R5
where
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, 5 substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, and where R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or a unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group;
Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, 0 x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
Q is -C(X)NR7- wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl; X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur; and R5 is -CH2X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, with the further provisos that:
A. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of -0-Z-NR8R8' and -O-Z-R12 wherein R8 and R8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, and where R8 and R8' are joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycle and substituted heterocycle, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -S -, Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
B. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5' where R5' is selected from the group consisting of -NR12C(Z')NR8R8' and -NR12C(Z')R13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR12, R12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R8 and R8 are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R8 and R8' is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic other than moφholino and thiomoφholino, substituted heterocyclic or R8 and R8 can be joined to form a saturated heterocycle other than moφholino or thiomoφholino, a saturated substituted heterocycle or a saturated/unsaturated heterocycle having an amino group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl substituent, and further provided that when Z' is sulfur, at least one of R8 and R8 is a group other than aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, R13 is selected from the group consisting of substituted heterocycles and saturated heterocycles other than moφholino and thiomoφholino, Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
C. R5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH2-) to the carbon atom to which it is attached; X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxycarbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxycarbonyl, heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic, substituted saturated heterocyclic, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenoxy, substituted alkynoxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocycloxy, substituted thioalkyl, substituted thioalkenyl, substituted thioalkynyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, guanidino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, halogen, cyano, nitro, -OS(0>2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic,
-NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl, -S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2- substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2-substituted aryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-heterocyclic, -S(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, N,N- (alkyl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N- (substituted aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N- (heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-N,N-(substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-(heterocyclic)amino, mono- and di- (substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(alkyl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (alkyl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, heterocyclic)amino,
N,N-(substituted aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, and N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino;
D. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5 where R5" is a substituent selected from the group consisting of:
(a) substituted alkylcarbonylamino with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl- substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0) alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substiruted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -SOj- alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02- cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, - S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(b) alkoxyaryl substituted on the alkoxy moiety with a substituent selected from the group consisting of carboxyl and -COOR23 where R23 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic, (c) aryl and heteroaryl;
(d) -NR'R' wherein each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl- substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-
NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, - NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- (substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substiruted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02- substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, - S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(e) -alkoxy-NR"R" wherein each R" is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when each R" is substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl- substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxy Iheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, - NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- (substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- (substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl,
-S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02- heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(f) substituted aryloxy and substituted heteroaryloxy with the proviso that at least one substituent on the substituted aryloxy /heteroaryloxy is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2- dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(g) -alkoxy-saturated heterocyclic, -alkoxy-saturated substituted heterocyclic, -substituted alkoxy-heterocyclic and -substituted alkoxy - substituted saturated heterocyclic;
(h) -O-heterocyclic and -O-substituted heterocyclic; (i) tetrazolyl;
(j) -NR-S02-substituted alkyl where R is hydrogen, alkyl or aryl, with the proviso that at least one substituent on the alkyl moiety of the substituted alkylsulfonylamino is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1 ,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(k) alkenylsulfonylamino, alkynylsulfonylamino, substituted alkenylsulfonylamino and substituted alkynylsulfonylamino; (1) substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea; (m) amidine and amidine substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic;
(n) -C(0)NR' "R" ' where each R" ' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2- dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea, then the other R" ' is alkyl, substituted alkyl (other than unsaturated heterocyclyl substituted-alkyl), cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
(o) -NR22C(0)-R18 where R18 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R22 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic; (p) -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl or -S02-alkyl;
(q) -NR'C(0)NR19R19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic:
(r) -NR'C(0)OR19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
(s) -aminocarbonyl-(N-formylheterocylcyl); and (t) -alkyl-C(0)NH-heterocyclyl and -alkyl-C(0)NH-substituted heterocyclyl, and
E. When R3 is other than H, R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5" where R5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl-cycloalkyl, carboxyl- substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substiruted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, - NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- (substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with - S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -
S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof and still further with the following provisos excluding the following compounds
A. when R1 and R2 are joined together with the S02 and nitrogen atom to which they are attached respectively to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R3 is hydrogen, and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R5 is not benzyl; and
B. when R1 is -methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R3 is hydrogen, Q is -C(0)NCH3-, then R5 is not benzyl.
A compound of formula IA:
R3 O
R1-S02-N(R2)-C-Q-CH-C-R6 IA
H R5
where
R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, substituted cycloalkenyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, and R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 can form a heterocyclic or a substituted heterocyclic group; R3 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic and where R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or a unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group;
Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
R6 is selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran- 3-yl (3,4-enol), amino, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkoxy, -O-(N-succinimidyl), -NH-adamantyl, -0-cholest-5-en-3-β-yl,
-NHOY where Y is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, and substituted aryl, -NH(CH2)pCOOY where ? is an integer of from 1 to 8 and Y is as defined above, -OCH2NR9R10 where R9 is selected from the group consisting of -C(0)-aryl and -C(0)-substituted aryl and R10 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and -CH2COORn where R11 is alkyl, and
-NHS02Z" where Z" is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
Q is -C(X)NR7- wherein R7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl;
X is selected from the group consisting of oxygen and sulfur; R5 is -CH2X where X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, acylamino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, aryl, aryloxyaryl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxy Iheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkoxy, substituted aryl, substituted aryloxy, substituted aryloxyaryl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, with the further provisos that:
A. R5 is not -(CH2)--Ar-R5' where R5' is selected from the group consisting of -0-Z-NR8R8' and -O-Z-R12 wherein R8 and R8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, and where R8 and R8' are joined to form a heterocycle or a substituted heterocycle, R12 is selected from the group consisting of heterocycle and substituted heterocycle, and Z is selected from the group consisting of -C(O)- and -SC^-, Ar is aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
B. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of -NR12C(Z')NR8R8' and -NR12C(Z')R13 wherein Z' is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and NR12, R12 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl and aryl, R8 and R8' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that when Z' is oxygen, at least one of R8 and R8 is sustituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic other than moφholino and thiomoφholino, substituted heterocyclic or R8 and R8 can be joined to form a saturated heterocycle other than moφholino or thiomoφholino, a saturated substituted heterocycle or a saturated/unsaturated heterocycle having an amino group substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl substituent, and further provided that when Z' is sulfur, at least one of R8 and R8 is a group other than aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, and R13 is selected from the group consisting of substituted heterocycles and saturated heterocycles other than moφholino and thiomoφholino, Ar is aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl or substituted heteroaryl, x is an integer of from 1 to 4;
C. R5 is not -ALK-X' where ALK is an alkyl group of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms attached via a methylene group (-CH2-) to the carbon atom to which it is attached; X' is selected from the group consisting of substituted alkylcarbonylamino, substituted alkenylcarbonylamino, substituted alkynylcarbonylamino, heterocyclylcarbonylamino, substituted heterocyclylcarbonylamino, acyl, acyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, acylamino, oxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, substituted alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, substituted aryloxycarbonyl, cycloalkoxycarbonyl, substituted cycloalkoxycarbonyl, heteroaryloxy carbonyl, substituted heteroaryloxycarbonyl, heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, substituted heterocyclyloxy carbonyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, saturated heterocyclic, substituted saturated heterocyclic, substituted alkoxy, substituted alkenoxy, substituted alkynoxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocycloxy, substituted thioalkyl, substituted thioalkenyl, substituted thioalkynyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, guanidino, amidino, alkylamidino, thioamidino, halogen, cyano, nitro, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR where R is hydrogen or alky, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted cycloalkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic where R is hydrogen or alkyl, -S(0)2-alkyl, -S(0)2-substituted alkyl, -S(0)2-aryl, -S(0)2-substituted aryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -S(0)2- heterocyclic, -S(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(alkyl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N- (heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N-(heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, N,N- N,N-(substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- (heterocyclic)amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (alkyl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(alkyl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(aryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, heterocyclic)amino,
N,N-(aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted aryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, N,N- (heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino, N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic)amino, and N,N-(substituted heteroaryl, substituted heterocyclic)amino;
D. R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5 where R5 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of:
(a) substituted alkylcarbonylamino with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxyl- cycloalkyl, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl- substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxythiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2-aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2- heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2- substituted heterocyclic, -OS02-NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2- heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2- NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-(substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-(substituted heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -SO^- alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02- cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, - S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(b) alkoxyaryl substituted on the alkoxy moiety with a substituent selected from the group consisting of carboxyl and -COOR23 where R23 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic,
(c) aryl and heteroaryl;
(d) -NR'R' wherein each R' is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that at least one of R' is substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and with the further proviso that when R' is substituted alkyl at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, ammothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, carboxyl- substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl,
-NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- (substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-
(substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02- heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl;
(e) -alkoxy-NR"R" wherein each R" is independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when each
R" is substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl- substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalky 1, carboxyl-substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl- substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -
NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- (substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- (substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02- substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, - S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02-substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; (f) substituted aryloxy and substituted heteroaryloxy with the proviso that at least one substituent on the substituted aryloxy /heteroaryloxy is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,2- dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(g) -alkoxy-saturated heterocyclic, -alkoxy-saturated substituted heterocyclic, -substituted alkoxy-heterocyclic and -substituted alkoxy- substituted saturated heterocyclic; (h) -O-heterocyclic and -O-substituted heterocyclic;
(i) tetrazolyl;
(j) -NR-S02-substituted alkyl where R is hydrogen, alkyl or aryl, with the proviso that at least one substituent on the alkyl moiety of the substituted alkylsulfonylamino is other than halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1 ,2-dioxy ethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea; (k) alkenylsulfonylamino, alkynylsulfonylamino, substituted alkenylsulfonylamino and substituted alkynylsulfonylamino;
(1) substituted alkoxy with the proviso that the substitution on the alkyl moiety of said substituted alkoxy does not include alkoxy-NR"R", unsaturated heterocyclyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, aryl, heteroaryl and aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2- dioxymethylene, 1,2-dioxyethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea;
(m) amidine and amidine substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic; (n) -C(0)NR' "R" ' where each R" ' is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when one R' " is unsaturated heterocyclic, aryl, heteroaryl or aryl/heteroaryl substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, 1,2-dioxymethylene, 1,
2- dioxyethylene, alkoxy, alkenoxy, alkynoxy, alkylamino, alkenylamino, alkynylamino, alkylcarbonyloxy, acyl, alkylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, N-alkyl or N,N-dialkylurea, then the other R" ' is alkyl, substituted alkyl (other than unsaturated heterocyclyl substituted-alkyl), cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic; (o) -NR22C(0)-R18 where R18 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R22 is alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic or substituted heterocyclic; (p) -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl or -S02-alkyl;
(q) -NR'C(0)NR19R19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic and each R19 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic: (r) -NR'C(0)OR19 wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic, and R19 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic and substituted heterocyclic;
(s) -aminocarbonyl-(N-formylheterocylcyl); and (t) -alkyl-C(0)NH-heterocyclyl and -alkyl-C(0)NH-substituted heterocyclyl, and E. When R3 is other than H, R5 is not -(CH2)X-Ar-R5" where R5" is substituted alkenyl or substituted alkynyl with the proviso that at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkenyl/alkynyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and substituted heterocyclic with the proviso that when substituted with substituted alkyl then at least one of the substituents on the substituted alkyl moiety is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, thiocarbonylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, amino, amidino, alkyl amidino, thioamidino, aminoacyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminothiocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryloxy, substituted aryloxy, cyano, nitro, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxy lalkyl, carboxyl-substituted alkyl, carboxy 1-cycloalkyl, carboxyl- substituted cycloalkyl, carboxylaryl, carboxyl-substituted aryl, carboxylheteroaryl, carboxyl-substituted heteroaryl, carboxylheterocyclic, carboxyl-substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, guanidino, guanidinosulfone, thiol, thioalkyl, substituted thioalkyl, thioaryl, substituted thioaryl, thiocycloalkyl, substituted thiocycloalkyl, thioheteroaryl, substituted thioheteroaryl, thioheterocyclic, substituted thioheterocyclic, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, cycloalkoxy, substituted cycloalkyoxy, heteraryloxy, substituted heteroaryloxy, heterocyclyloxy, substituted heterocyclyloxy, oxycarbonylamino, oxy thiocarbonylamino, -OS(0)2-alkyl, -OS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -OS(0)2- aryl, -OS(0)2-substituted aryl, -OS(0)2-heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -OS(0)2-heterocyclic, -OS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, -OS02- NRR, -NRS(0)2-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-aryl, -
NRS(0)2-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-substituted heterocyclic, - NRS(0)2-NR-alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-substituted alkyl, -NRS(0)2-NR-aryl, - NRS(0)2-NR-substituted aryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heteroaryl, -NRS(0)2-NR-heterocyclic, -NRS(0)2-NR- substituted heterocyclic, mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- (substituted aryl)amino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di- (substituted heteroaryl)amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, mono- and di-(substituted heterocyclic) amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocyclic, substituted alkyl groups having amino groups blocked by conventional blocking groups (such as Boc, Cbz, formyl, and the like) and alkyl/substituted alkyl groups substituted with -S02-alkyl, -S02-substituted alkyl, -S02-alkenyl, -S02-substituted alkenyl, -S02-cycloalkyl, -S02-substituted cycloalkyl, -S02-aryl, -S02-substituted aryl, -S02-heteroaryl, -S02-substituted heteroaryl, -S02-heterocyclic, -S02- substituted heterocyclic or -S02NRR, where R is hydrogen or alkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, with the following provisos
A. when R1 is ø-carboxymethylphenyl, R2 is hydrogen, R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl; B. when R1 and R2 are joined to form a benzoisothiazolone heterocyclic ring, R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R5 is benzyl and Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl;
C. when R1 is -methylphenyl, R2 is hydrogen, R5 is benzyl or -hydroxybenzyl, R3 is -(CH2)sC(0)0-t-butyl where s is 1 or 2, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-t-butyl;
D. when R1 is -methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R5 is benzyl, R3 is -CH(φ)2, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-benzyl;
E. when R1 is ?-methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R5 is methyl, R3 is -hydroxymethyl, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-methyl; and F. when R1 is -methylphenyl, R2 is methyl, R3 is methyl or t-butyl, R5 is /7-hydroxybenzyl, Q is -C(0)NH-, then R6 is not -O-t-butyl.
3. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl.
4. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of 4-methylphenyl, methyl, benzyl, n-butyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 1 -naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, phenyl, 2,4,6- trimethylphenyl, 2-(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl, 2-carboxyphenyl, 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 4-trifluoromethylphenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- dimethoxyphenyl, 4-(CH3C(0)NH-)phenyl, 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4- cyanophenyl, isopropyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4- t-butoxyphenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 2-thienyl, l-N-methyl-3-methyl-5- chloropyrazol-4-yl, phenethyl, l-N-methylimidazol-4-yl, 4-bromophenyl,
4-amidinophenyl, 4-methylamidinophenyl, 4-[CH3SC(=NH)]phenyl, 5- chloro-2-thienyl, 2,5-dichloro-4-thienyl, l-N-methyl-4-pyrazolyl, 2- thiazolyl, 5-methyl-l,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl, 4-[H2NC(S)]phenyl, 4- aminophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, pyridin-3-yl, pyrimidin-2-yl, 4-(3'-dimethylamino-n- propoxy)-phenyl, and l-methylpyrazol-4-yl.
5. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, phenyl, benzyl, -(CH2)2-2- thienyl, and -(CH2)2-φ.
6. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 are joined to form a heterocyclic group or substituted heterocyclic group.
7. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, phenyl, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, -CH2CH2-COOH, -CH2-COOH, 2-amidoethyl, wo-butyl, t-butyl, -CH20- benzyl and hydroxymethyl.
8. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 are joined to form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or an unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group.
9. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein Q is -C(0)NH- or -C(S)NH-.
10. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of benzyl, (N-benzylimidazol-4-yl)methyl, (pyridin-2-yl)methyl, (pyridin-3-yl)methyl, (pyridin-4-yl)methyl, 4-[2- (pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4- iodobenzyl, 4-cyanobenzyl, 4-(2-bromobenzamido)benzyl, 4-(pyridin-4-yl- C (0)ΝH-)benzy 1 , and 4-hy droxybenzy 1.
11. A compound according to Claims 1 or 2 wherein R6 is selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran-3-yl (3,4-enol), methoxy, ethoxy, wo-propoxy, «-butoxy, t-butoxy, cyclopentoxy, neo- pentoxy, 2-α-z'sø-propyl-4-β-methylcyclohexoxy, 2-β-isopropyl-4-β- methylcyclohexoxy, -NH2, benzyloxy, -NHCH2COOH, -NHCH2CH2COOH, -NH-adamantyl, -NHCH2CH2COOCH2CH3, -NHS02- -CH3-φ, -NHOR8 where R8 is hydrogen, methyl, z'so-propyl or benzyl, O-(N-succinimidyl), -0-cholest-5-en-3-β-yl, -OCH2-OC(0)C(CH3)3, -0(CH2)zNHC(0)W where z is 1 or 2 and W is selected from the group consisting of pyrid-3-yl, N-methylpyridyl, and N-methyl-l,4-dihydro- pyrid-3-yl, -NR"C(0)-R' where R' is aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic and R" is hydrogen or -CH2C(0)OCH2CH3.
12. A compound selected from the group consisting of
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carbonyl- L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-phenylalanyl-D, L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(3-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(4-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-β-(2-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D ,L-phenylsarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S- 1,2,3 ,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-3-carbonyl)- L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D ,L-phenylglycyl-L-pheny lalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulf ony 1)-D ,L-phenylglycy 1-L-pheny lalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]-D,L- phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]-D,L- phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-(iodo)phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-cyanophenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-tert-butylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-D,L-alaninyl-L-4-(isonicotinamido)phenylalanine methyl ester
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof as well as any of the ester compounds recited above wherein one ester is replaced with another ester selected from the group consisting of methyl ester, ethyl ester, -n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, rt-butyl ester, isobutyl ester, .sec-butyl ester and tert- butyl ester.
13. A method for binding VLA-4 in a biological sample which method comprises contacting the biological sample with a compound of Claims 1 or 2 under conditions wherein said compound binds to VLA-4.
14. The method of claim 13 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heterocyclic, substituted heterocylic, heteroaryl and substituted heteroaryl.
15. The method of claim 13 wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of 4-methylphenyl, methyl, benzyl, tz-butyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 1- naphthyl, 2-naphthyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, phenyl, 2,4,6-trimethylphenyl, 2-
(methoxycarbonyl)phenyl, 2-carboxyphenyl, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 4- trifluoromethylphenyl, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 4- (CH3C(0)ΝH-)phenyl, 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, isopropyl, 3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4-t- buioxyphenyl, 4-nitrophenyl, 2-thienyl, l-N-methyl-3-methyl-5- chloropyrazol-4-yl, phenethyl, l-N-methylimidazol-4-yl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-amidinophenyl, 4-methylamidinophenyl, 4-[CH3SC(=NH)]phenyl, 5- chloro-2-thienyl, 2,5-dichloro-4-thienyl, l-N-methyl-4-pyrazolyl, 2- thiazolyl, 5-methyl-l,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl, 4-[H2NC(S)]phenyl, 4- aminophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 3 -fluorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, pyridin-3-yl, pyrimidin-2-yl, 4-(3'-dimethylamino-n- propoxy)-phenyl, and l-methylpyrazol-4-yl.
16. The method of claim 13 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, phenyl, benzyl, -(CH2)2-2-thienyl, and -(CH2)2-φ.
17. The method of claim 13 wherein R1 and R2 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the S02 group bound to R1 are joined to form a heterocyclic group or substituted heterocyclic group.
18. The method of claim 13 wherein R3 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, phenyl, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, -CH2CH2-COOH, -CH2-COOH, 2-amidoethyl, iso-butyl, t-butyl, -CH20- benzyl and hydroxymethyl.
19. The method of claim 13 wherein R2 and R3 together with the nitrogen atom bound to R2 and the carbon atom bound to R3 are joined to form an unsaturated heterocyclic group or an unsaturated substituted heterocyclic group.
' 20. The method of claim 13 wherein Q is -C(0)NH- or -C(S)NH-.
21. The method of claim 13 wherein R5 is selected from the group consisting of benzyl, (N-benzylimidazol-4-yl)methyl, (pyridin-2-yl)methyl, (pyridin-3-yl)methyl, (pyridin-4-yl)methyl, 4-[2-(pyridin-2- yl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]benzyl, 4-iodobenzyl, 4- cyanobenzyl, 4-(2-bromobenzamido)benzyl, 4-(pyridin-4-yl-C(0)NH- )benzyl, and 4-hydroxybenzyl.
22. The method of claim 13 wherein R6 is selected from the group consisting of 2,4-dioxo-tetrahydrofuran-3-yl (3,4-enol), methoxy, ethoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, t-butoxy, cyclopentoxy, rceø-pentoxy, 2-a-iso- propyl-4-β-methylcyclohexoxy, 2-β-isopropyl-4-β-methylcyclohexoxy, -NH2, benzyloxy, -NHCH2COOH, -NHCH2CH2C00H, -NH-adamantyl, -NHCH2CH2COOCH2CH3, -NHS02-/?-CH3-φ, -NHOR8 where R8 is hydrogen, methyl, zsø-propyl or benzyl, O-(N-succinimidyl), -O-cholest-5- en-3-β-yl, -OCH2-OC(0)C(CH3)3, -0(CH2)zNHC(0)W where z is 1 or 2 and W is selected from the group consisting of pyrid-3-yl, N- methylpyridyl, and N-methyl-l,4-dihydro-pyrid-3-yl, -NR"C(0)-R' where R' is aryl, heteroaryl or heterocyclic and R" is hydrogen or - CH2C(0)OCH2CH3.
23. The method of claim 13 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of:
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline-3-carbonyl- L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbonylbenzenesulf ony l)glycy 1-L-pheny lalanine
N-(2-methoxycarbonylbenzenesulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D , L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-phenylalanyl-D,L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(3-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-β-(4-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-β-(2-pyridyl)alanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D , L-phenylsarcosyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-l,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinolin-3-carbonyl)- L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-(2S-indolin-2-carbonyl)-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-alanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulf ony 1)-D , L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-(0-benzyl)seryl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-diphenylalanyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D, L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine ethyl ester N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-D, L-phenylglycyl-L-phenylalanine benzyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-benzylglycyl-L-phenylalanine N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethynyl]-D,L- phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-4-[2-(3-hydroxyphenyl)ethynyl]-D,L- phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D,L-4-(iodo)phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-thienylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-methyl-L-seryl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-(N-benzyl)histidine methyl ester
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-N-(2-phenylethyl)glycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)sarcosyl-D , L-4-cyanopheny lalanine
N-(toluene-4-sulfonyl)-L-tert-butylglycyl-L-phenylalanine
N-(saccharin-2-yl)-D,L-alaninyl-L-4-(isonicotinamido)phenylalanine methyl ester
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof as well as any of the ester compounds recited above wherein one ester is replaced with another ester selected from the group consisting of methyl ester, ethyl ester, n-propyl ester, isopropyl ester, n-butyl ester, isobutyl ester, sec-butyl ester and tert- butyl ester.
24. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a therapeutically effective amount of one or more of the compounds of Claims 1 or 2.
25. A method for treating an inflammatory disease in a mammalian patient which disease is mediated by VLA-4 which method comprises administering to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition of Claim 24.
26. The method according to Claim 25 wherein said inflammatory condition is selected from the group consisting of asthma, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, AIDS dementia, diabetes (including acute juvenile onset diabetis), inflammatory bowel disease (including ulcerative colitis and Crohn's disease), multiple sclerosis, rheumatoid arthritis, tissue transplantation, tumor metastasis, meningitis, encephalitis, stroke, and other cerebral traumas, nephritis, retinitis, atopic dermatitis, psoriasis, myocardial ischemia and acute leukocyte-mediated lung injury such as that which occurs in adult respiratory distress syndrome.
PCT/US1998/015952 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4 WO1999006433A1 (en)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
HU0004529A HUP0004529A3 (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Sulfonilated dipeptide-compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4, pharmaceutical compositions comprising thereof and their use
AU86786/98A AU8678698A (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
BR9811569-3A BR9811569A (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds that inhibit vla-4-mediated leukocyte adhesion
EP98938207A EP1001973A1 (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
KR1020007001005A KR20010022423A (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
CA002290746A CA2290746A1 (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
JP2000505188A JP2001512136A (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds that inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
IL13364198A IL133641A0 (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
NO20000451A NO20000451L (en) 1997-07-31 2000-01-28 Compounds that inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US90441697A 1997-07-31 1997-07-31
US08/904,416 1997-07-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1999006433A1 true WO1999006433A1 (en) 1999-02-11

Family

ID=25419117

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1998/015952 WO1999006433A1 (en) 1997-07-31 1998-07-31 Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4

Country Status (12)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1001973A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2001512136A (en)
KR (1) KR20010022423A (en)
CN (1) CN1265669A (en)
AU (1) AU8678698A (en)
BR (1) BR9811569A (en)
CA (1) CA2290746A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0004529A3 (en)
IL (1) IL133641A0 (en)
NO (1) NO20000451L (en)
PL (1) PL338506A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1999006433A1 (en)

Cited By (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0998282A1 (en) * 1997-05-29 2000-05-10 Merck &amp; Co., Inc. (a New Jersey corp.) Sulfonamides as cell adhesion inhibitors
US6093696A (en) * 1997-05-30 2000-07-25 Celltech Therapeutics, Limited Tyrosine derivatives
US6110945A (en) * 1998-06-03 2000-08-29 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Aromatic amine derivatives
US6221888B1 (en) 1997-05-29 2001-04-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Sulfonamides as cell adhesion inhibitors
US6274577B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2001-08-14 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Benzodiazepines
US6319922B1 (en) 1998-11-23 2001-11-20 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Propanoic acid derivatives
US6329372B1 (en) 1998-01-27 2001-12-11 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
WO2002002556A2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2002-01-10 Ortho Mcneil Pharmaceutical, Inc. AZA-BRIDGED-BICYCLIC AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES AS α4 INTEGRIN ANTAGONISTS
US6348463B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2002-02-19 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6362204B1 (en) 1998-05-22 2002-03-26 Celltech Therapeutics, Ltd Phenylalanine derivatives
US6403608B1 (en) 2000-05-30 2002-06-11 Celltech R&D, Ltd. 3-Substituted isoquinolin-1-yl derivatives
US6436904B1 (en) 1999-01-25 2002-08-20 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6455539B2 (en) 1999-12-23 2002-09-24 Celltech R&D Limited Squaric acid derivates
US6465471B1 (en) 1998-07-03 2002-10-15 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Cinnamic acid derivatives
US6469025B1 (en) 2000-08-02 2002-10-22 Celltech R&D Ltd. 3-substituted isoquinolin-1-yl derivatives
US6479492B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2002-11-12 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6482849B1 (en) 1997-06-23 2002-11-19 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4β1 mediated cell adhesion
US6518283B1 (en) 1999-05-28 2003-02-11 Celltech R&D Limited Squaric acid derivatives
US6521626B1 (en) 1998-03-24 2003-02-18 Celltech R&D Limited Thiocarboxamide derivatives
US6521666B1 (en) 1998-01-20 2003-02-18 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US6534513B1 (en) 1999-09-29 2003-03-18 Celltech R&D Limited Phenylalkanoic acid derivatives
WO2003024933A1 (en) * 2001-09-12 2003-03-27 Kaken Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. 2-phenyl-3-heteroarylpropionic acid derivative or salt thereof and medicine containing the same
US6545013B2 (en) 2000-05-30 2003-04-08 Celltech R&D Limited 2,7-naphthyridine derivatives
US6555562B1 (en) 1998-02-26 2003-04-29 Celltech R&D Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6610700B2 (en) 2000-04-17 2003-08-26 Celltech R & D Limited Enamine derivatives
US6667331B2 (en) 1999-12-28 2003-12-23 Pfizer Inc Non-peptidyl inhibitors of VLA-4 dependent cell binding useful in treating inflammatory, autoimmune, and respiratory diseases
US6685617B1 (en) 1998-06-23 2004-02-03 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Inhibitors of α4β1 mediated cell adhesion
US6740654B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2004-05-25 Celltech R & D Limited Squaric acid derivatives
US6903075B1 (en) 1997-05-29 2005-06-07 Merck & Co., Inc. Heterocyclic amide compounds as cell adhesion inhibitors
US6953798B1 (en) 1998-11-30 2005-10-11 Celltech R&D Limited β-alanine derivates
US7008949B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-03-07 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7026501B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2006-04-11 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US7026328B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-04-11 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7034043B2 (en) 1999-08-13 2006-04-25 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors
US7196112B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2007-03-27 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors
US7452912B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2008-11-18 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fused ring heteroaryl and heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7476758B2 (en) 2002-02-28 2009-01-13 Mitsubishi Tanbe Pharma Corporation Process for preparing a phenylalanine derivative and intermediates thereof
WO2009126920A2 (en) 2008-04-11 2009-10-15 Merrimack Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human serum albumin linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2510941A2 (en) 2007-02-20 2012-10-17 Merrimack Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating multiple sclerosis by administration of alpha-fetoprotein in combination with an integrin antagonist
US8557983B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2013-10-15 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US8952157B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2015-02-10 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US9045420B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-06-02 Abbvie Inc. Bcl-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases
US9072748B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-07-07 Abbvie Inc. BCL-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR2869904B1 (en) * 2004-05-07 2006-07-28 Fournier S A Sa Lab MODULATORS OF LXR RECEIVERS

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0526348A1 (en) * 1991-08-02 1993-02-03 Sanofi Indoline derivatives carrying an amide function, their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
WO1994007815A2 (en) * 1992-09-25 1994-04-14 Abbott Laboratories Small peptide anaphylatoxin receptor ligands
WO1994012181A1 (en) * 1992-12-01 1994-06-09 Merck & Co., Inc. Fibrinogen receptor antagonists
WO1995015973A1 (en) * 1993-12-06 1995-06-15 Cytel Corporation Cs-1 peptidomimetics, compositions and methods of using the same
JPH0873422A (en) * 1994-09-07 1996-03-19 Kdk Corp New amino acid ester and method for detecting leukocyte, esterase or protease
WO1996022966A1 (en) * 1995-01-23 1996-08-01 Biogen, Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0526348A1 (en) * 1991-08-02 1993-02-03 Sanofi Indoline derivatives carrying an amide function, their preparation and pharmaceutical compositions containing them
WO1994007815A2 (en) * 1992-09-25 1994-04-14 Abbott Laboratories Small peptide anaphylatoxin receptor ligands
WO1994012181A1 (en) * 1992-12-01 1994-06-09 Merck & Co., Inc. Fibrinogen receptor antagonists
WO1995015973A1 (en) * 1993-12-06 1995-06-15 Cytel Corporation Cs-1 peptidomimetics, compositions and methods of using the same
JPH0873422A (en) * 1994-09-07 1996-03-19 Kdk Corp New amino acid ester and method for detecting leukocyte, esterase or protease
WO1996022966A1 (en) * 1995-01-23 1996-08-01 Biogen, Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS, vol. 125, no. 3, 15 July 1996, Columbus, Ohio, US; abstract no. 34164, INOE, TOSHIHISA ET AL: "Preparation of amino acid esters and detection of leukocyte, esterase, or protease" XP002087653 *

Cited By (74)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6903075B1 (en) 1997-05-29 2005-06-07 Merck & Co., Inc. Heterocyclic amide compounds as cell adhesion inhibitors
US6221888B1 (en) 1997-05-29 2001-04-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Sulfonamides as cell adhesion inhibitors
EP0998282A4 (en) * 1997-05-29 2000-08-30 Merck & Co Inc Sulfonamides as cell adhesion inhibitors
EP0998282A1 (en) * 1997-05-29 2000-05-10 Merck &amp; Co., Inc. (a New Jersey corp.) Sulfonamides as cell adhesion inhibitors
US6093696A (en) * 1997-05-30 2000-07-25 Celltech Therapeutics, Limited Tyrosine derivatives
US6482849B1 (en) 1997-06-23 2002-11-19 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4β1 mediated cell adhesion
US6596752B1 (en) 1997-06-23 2003-07-22 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4β1 mediated cell adhesion
US6521666B1 (en) 1998-01-20 2003-02-18 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US6855843B2 (en) 1998-01-20 2005-02-15 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US6329372B1 (en) 1998-01-27 2001-12-11 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6555562B1 (en) 1998-02-26 2003-04-29 Celltech R&D Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6521626B1 (en) 1998-03-24 2003-02-18 Celltech R&D Limited Thiocarboxamide derivatives
US6362204B1 (en) 1998-05-22 2002-03-26 Celltech Therapeutics, Ltd Phenylalanine derivatives
US6110945A (en) * 1998-06-03 2000-08-29 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Aromatic amine derivatives
US6369229B1 (en) 1998-06-03 2002-04-09 Celltech Therapeutics, Limited Pyridylalanine derivatives
US6685617B1 (en) 1998-06-23 2004-02-03 Pharmacia & Upjohn Company Inhibitors of α4β1 mediated cell adhesion
US6465471B1 (en) 1998-07-03 2002-10-15 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Cinnamic acid derivatives
US6677339B2 (en) 1998-09-28 2004-01-13 Celltech R & D Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6348463B1 (en) 1998-09-28 2002-02-19 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Phenylalanine derivatives
US6274577B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2001-08-14 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Benzodiazepines
US6319922B1 (en) 1998-11-23 2001-11-20 Celltech Therapeutics Limited Propanoic acid derivatives
US6953798B1 (en) 1998-11-30 2005-10-11 Celltech R&D Limited β-alanine derivates
US6479492B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2002-11-12 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7452912B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2008-11-18 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Fused ring heteroaryl and heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6903088B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2005-06-07 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7538215B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2009-05-26 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7005433B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2006-02-28 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6492372B1 (en) 1999-01-22 2002-12-10 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7378529B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2008-05-27 Wyeth Heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7049306B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2006-05-23 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4.
US6911439B2 (en) 1999-01-22 2005-06-28 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroaryl, heterocyclic and aryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6436904B1 (en) 1999-01-25 2002-08-20 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6949570B2 (en) 1999-01-25 2005-09-27 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6518283B1 (en) 1999-05-28 2003-02-11 Celltech R&D Limited Squaric acid derivatives
US7034043B2 (en) 1999-08-13 2006-04-25 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors
US6534513B1 (en) 1999-09-29 2003-03-18 Celltech R&D Limited Phenylalkanoic acid derivatives
US6455539B2 (en) 1999-12-23 2002-09-24 Celltech R&D Limited Squaric acid derivates
US6668527B2 (en) 1999-12-28 2003-12-30 Pfizer Inc. Non-peptidyl inhibitors of VLA-4 dependent cell binding useful in treating inflammatory, autoimmune, and respiratory diseases
US6667331B2 (en) 1999-12-28 2003-12-23 Pfizer Inc Non-peptidyl inhibitors of VLA-4 dependent cell binding useful in treating inflammatory, autoimmune, and respiratory diseases
US6903128B2 (en) 1999-12-28 2005-06-07 Pfizer Inc Non-peptidyl inhibitors of VLA-4 dependent cell binding useful in treating inflammatory, autoimmune, and respiratory diseases
US6610700B2 (en) 2000-04-17 2003-08-26 Celltech R & D Limited Enamine derivatives
US6780874B2 (en) 2000-04-17 2004-08-24 Celltech R & D Limited Enamine derivatives
US6403608B1 (en) 2000-05-30 2002-06-11 Celltech R&D, Ltd. 3-Substituted isoquinolin-1-yl derivatives
US6545013B2 (en) 2000-05-30 2003-04-08 Celltech R&D Limited 2,7-naphthyridine derivatives
WO2002002556A2 (en) * 2000-06-30 2002-01-10 Ortho Mcneil Pharmaceutical, Inc. AZA-BRIDGED-BICYCLIC AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES AS α4 INTEGRIN ANTAGONISTS
US6960597B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2005-11-01 Orth-Mcneil Pharmaceutical, Inc. Aza-bridged-bicyclic amino acid derivatives as α4 integrin antagonists
WO2002002556A3 (en) * 2000-06-30 2002-07-18 Ortho Mcneil Pharm Inc AZA-BRIDGED-BICYCLIC AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES AS α4 INTEGRIN ANTAGONISTS
US6740654B2 (en) 2000-07-07 2004-05-25 Celltech R & D Limited Squaric acid derivatives
US6469025B1 (en) 2000-08-02 2002-10-22 Celltech R&D Ltd. 3-substituted isoquinolin-1-yl derivatives
US7026501B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2006-04-11 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US7456217B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2008-11-25 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corporation Inhibitors of alpha4 mediated cell adhesion
US8501809B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2013-08-06 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corporation Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US7671090B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2010-03-02 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corporation Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US7872151B2 (en) 2000-08-31 2011-01-18 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corporation Inhibitors of α4 mediated cell adhesion
US7361679B2 (en) 2001-09-12 2008-04-22 Kaken Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. 2-phenyl-3-heteroarylpropionic acid derivative or salt thereof and medicine containing the same
WO2003024933A1 (en) * 2001-09-12 2003-03-27 Kaken Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. 2-phenyl-3-heteroarylpropionic acid derivative or salt thereof and medicine containing the same
US7476758B2 (en) 2002-02-28 2009-01-13 Mitsubishi Tanbe Pharma Corporation Process for preparing a phenylalanine derivative and intermediates thereof
US7135477B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-11-14 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7335663B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2008-02-26 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroaryl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7026328B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-04-11 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7008949B2 (en) 2002-05-24 2006-03-07 Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by α4 integrins
US7196112B2 (en) 2004-07-16 2007-03-27 Biogen Idec Ma Inc. Cell adhesion inhibitors
EP2510941A2 (en) 2007-02-20 2012-10-17 Merrimack Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating multiple sclerosis by administration of alpha-fetoprotein in combination with an integrin antagonist
WO2009126920A2 (en) 2008-04-11 2009-10-15 Merrimack Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human serum albumin linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2860260A1 (en) 2008-04-11 2015-04-15 Merrimack Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Human serum albumin linkers and conjugates thereof
US8557983B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2013-10-15 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US8952157B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2015-02-10 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US9029404B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2015-05-12 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US9303025B2 (en) 2008-12-04 2016-04-05 Abbvie Inc. Apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune and autoimmune diseases
US9045420B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-06-02 Abbvie Inc. Bcl-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases
US9073855B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-07-07 Abbvie Inc. BCL-2 selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases
US9072748B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-07-07 Abbvie Inc. BCL-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases
US9125913B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2015-09-08 Abbvie Inc. Bcl-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases
US9315488B2 (en) 2008-12-05 2016-04-19 Abbvie Inc. Bcl-2-selective apoptosis-inducing agents for the treatment of cancer and immune diseases

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
PL338506A1 (en) 2000-11-06
EP1001973A1 (en) 2000-05-24
NO20000451L (en) 2000-03-23
AU8678698A (en) 1999-02-22
IL133641A0 (en) 2001-04-30
JP2001512136A (en) 2001-08-21
HUP0004529A3 (en) 2001-05-28
CA2290746A1 (en) 1999-02-11
HUP0004529A2 (en) 2001-04-28
KR20010022423A (en) 2001-03-15
CN1265669A (en) 2000-09-06
BR9811569A (en) 2000-09-19
NO20000451D0 (en) 2000-01-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1001974B1 (en) 4-amino-phenylalanine type compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
EP1001973A1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
US7229970B2 (en) Carbamyloxy compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
AU756696B2 (en) Substituted phenylalanine type compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
WO1999006432A1 (en) Dipeptide and related compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
EP1001975A1 (en) Benzyl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
EP0994895A1 (en) Dipeptide compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
AU8823498A (en) Sulfonylated dipeptide compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
EP1000051A1 (en) Carbamyloxy compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
US6583139B1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6949570B2 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6492421B1 (en) Substituted phenylalanine type compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6423688B1 (en) Dipeptide and related compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6362341B1 (en) Benzyl compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6291453B1 (en) 4-amino-phenylalanine type compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US6559127B1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
US7030114B1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
WO2000043415A1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
US20040006093A1 (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by VLA-4
MXPA00000909A (en) Compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4
MXPA00000706A (en) Dipeptide and related compounds which inhibit leukocyte adhesion mediated by vla-4

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 133641

Country of ref document: IL

Ref document number: 98807765.5

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2290746

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2290746

Country of ref document: CA

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 86786/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/2000/000909

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 502583

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020007001005

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1998938207

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1998938207

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020007001005

Country of ref document: KR

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1998938207

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1020007001005

Country of ref document: KR